S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch
Contents
1 Get Started
2 Configure System Information
3 Configure Switching
4 Configure Quality of Service
5 Manage Device Security
6 Monitor the System
7 Maintenance
A Configuration Examples
B Specifications and Default Settings

NETGEAR GS308T User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for GS308T by NETGEAR which is a product in the Network Switches category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

NETGEAR GS308T Manual

NETGEAR NETGEAR Manual

NETGEAR AGM731F Manual

NETGEAR ProSafe GS724TR Manual

NETGEAR GS608-300PES Manual

NETGEAR N600 Manual

NETGEAR GSM7248 Manual

NETGEAR, Inc.

350 East Plumeria Drive

San Jose, CA 95134, USA

November 2019

202-11890-02

User Manual

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart

Managed Pro Switch

User Manual

Models

GS308T

GS310TP

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

User Manual2

Support

Thank you for purchasing this NETGEAR product. You can visit https://www.netgear.com/support/ to register your

product, get help, access the latest downloads and user manuals, and join our community. We recommend that you

use only official NETGEAR support resources

Compliance and Conformity

For regulatory compliance information including the EU Declaration of Conformity, visit

https://www.netgear.com/about/regulatory/.

See the regulatory compliance document before connecting the power supply.

Do not use this device outdoors. If you connect cables or devices that are outdoors to this device, see

http://kb.netgear.com/000057103 for safety and warranty information.

Trademarks

trademarks are used for reference purposes only.

Revision History

Publication

Part Number Publish Date Comments

202-11890-02 November 2019 We made changes to the information in and the organization of Chapter 1, Get

Started and Chapter 5, Manage Device Security.

We made multiple other minor changes and minor corrections in the manual.

We published the manual in a new format.

202-11890-01 January 2019 First publication

Contents

Chapter 1 Get Started

Available Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Switch Management and Discovery Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Options to Change the Default IP Address of the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Discover or Change the Switch IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Discover the Switch in a Network With a DHCP Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

Discover the Switch in a Network Without a DHCP Server. . . . . . . . . . .13

Use the NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool to Access the Switch. . . . . . .15

Use the NETGEAR Insight Mobile App to Discover the Switch . . . . . . .16

Configure a Static IP Address From a Directly Connected Computer .16

About the User Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Software Requirements to Use the Local Browser Interface. . . . . . . . . .18

Supported Web Browsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Access the Local Browser Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Navigation Tabs, Configuration Menus, and Page Menu . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Configuration and Status Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Buttons in the Local Browser Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

User-Defined Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Change the Language of the Local Browser Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Use the Device View of the Local Browser Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Power LED in the Device View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

PoE Max LED in the Device View (Model GS310TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Interface Naming Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Configure Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Context-Sensitive Help and Access to the Support WebSite . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Access the User Guide Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Chapter 2 Configure System Information

View and Configure the Switch Management Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

View or Define System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

View the System CPU Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Configure the IP Network and VLAN Settings for the

Local Browser Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Configure the Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Configure Denial of Service Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Configure DNS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Configure Green Ethernet Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Use the Device View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

User Manual4

Configure PoE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Configure the Global PoE Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Configure the PoE Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Configure SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Configure the SNMPv1/v2 Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

Configure SNMPv1/v2 Trap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Configure SNMPv1/v2 Trap Flags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

View the Supported MIBs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Configure SNMP V3 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Configure LLDP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Configure LLDP Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

Configure LLDP Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

View the LLDP-MED Network Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Configure LLDP-MED Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

View the Local Information Advertised Through LLDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

View LLDP Neighbors Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

Configure DHCP Snooping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Configure the Global DHCP Snooping Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Enable DHCP for All Interfaces in a VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Configure DHCP Snooping Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Configure Static DHCP Bindings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Configure DHCP Snooping Persistent Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

View or Clear DHCP Snooping Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

Set Up PoE Timer Schedules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Create a PoE Timer Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Specify the Settings for an Absolute PoE Timer Schedule . . . . . . . . . . .95

Specify the Settings for a Recurring PoE Timer Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . .97

Change the Settings for a Recurring PoE Timer Schedule Entry . . . . . .99

Delete a PoE Timer Schedule Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Delete a PoE Timer Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Chapter 3 Configure Switching

Configure the Port Settings and Maximum Frame Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Configure Link Aggregation Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

Configure LAG Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Configure LAG Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Set the LACP System Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Set the LACP Port Priority Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Configure VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Configure VLAN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Configure VLAN Membership. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

View the VLAN Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Configure Port PVID Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Configure a MAC-Based VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Group Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Configure a Voice VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

User Manual5

Configure Auto-VoIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Configure Protocol-Based Port Settings for VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Configure Auto-VoIP OUI-Based Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Configure the OUI-Based Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Manage the OUI Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Display the Auto-VoIP Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Configure Spanning Tree Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Configure the STP Settings and View the STP Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Configure and View the CST Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Configure and View the CST Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

View the CST Port Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

View Rapid STP Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Manage MST Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Configure and View the Port Settings for an MST Instance. . . . . . . . . 144

View the STP Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Configure Multicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

View and Search the MFDB Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

View the MFDB Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Configure the Auto-Video Multicast Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

About IGMP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Configure IGMP Snooping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Configure IGMP Snooping for Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

View, Search, or Clear the IGMP Snooping Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Configure IGMP Snooping for VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Modify IGMP Snooping Settings for a VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Disable IGMP Snooping on a VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Configure a Multicast Router Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Configure a Multicast Router VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

IGMP Snooping Querier Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Configure an IGMP Snooping Querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Configure an IGMP Snooping Querier for VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Display IGMP Snooping Querier for VLAN Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

View, Search, and Manage the MAC Address Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

View, Search, or Clear the MAC Address Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Set the Dynamic Address Aging Interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Add a Static MAC Address to the MAC Address Table . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Configure Layer 2 Loop Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

Configure Global Layer 2 Loop Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

View and Configure Layer 2 Loop Protection on a Port. . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Chapter 4 Configure Quality of Service

Quality of Service Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Manage Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

CoS Configuration Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Configure Global CoS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Configure CoS Interface Settings for an Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Configure CoS Queue Settings for an Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Map 802.1p Priorities to Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

User Manual6

Map DSCP Values to Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Manage Differentiated Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

Defining DiffServ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Configure and Display Global DiffServ Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Configure a DiffServ Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Configure a DiffServ Policy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Configure the DiffServ Service Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

View DiffServ Service Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Chapter 5 Manage Device Security

Configure the Management Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Change the Password for the Local Browser Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Manage the RADIUS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Configure TACACS+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Configure Authentication Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Manage the Smart Control Center Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Configure Management Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218

Configure HTTP Access Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Configure HTTPS Access Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Manage Certificates for HTTPS Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Transfer an Existing Certificate to the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Manage Access Control to the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Configure Port Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231

Configure Global 802.1X Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Manage Port Authentication on Individual Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

View the Port Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

View the Client Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Set Up Traffic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Manage MAC Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

MAC Filter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Configure Storm Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Manage Port Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Configure Protected Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Configure Access Control Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253

Use the ACL Wizard to Create a Simple ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Configure a Basic MAC ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Configure MAC ACL Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Configure MAC Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

View or Delete MAC ACL Bindings in the MAC Binding Table . . . . . 267

Configure a Basic or Extended IP ACL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Configure Rules for a Basic IP ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Configure Rules for an Extended IP ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Configure IP ACL Interface Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

View or Delete IP ACL Bindings in the IP ACL Binding Table . . . . . . . 284

Configure VLAN ACL Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

User Manual7

Chapter 6 Monitor the System

Monitor the Switch and the Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

View Switch Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

View Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

View and Manage Detailed Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

View or Clear EAP and EAPoL Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Perform a Cable Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Configure and View Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304

Manage the Memory Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Manage the Flash Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Manage the Server Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

View or Clear the Trap Logs and the Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Configure Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312

Chapter 7 Maintenance

Reboot the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Reset the Switch to Its Factory Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317

Export a File From the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318

Use TFTP to Export a File From the Switch to a TFTP Server . . . . . . . 318

Use HTTP to Export a File from the Switch to a Computer . . . . . . . . . 320

Download a File to the Switch or Update the Firmware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321

Use TFTP to Download a File to the Switch or Update the

Software Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Use HTTP to Download a File to the Switch or Update the

Software Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Manage Software Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325

Copy a Software Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Configure Dual Image Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

View the Dual Image Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Perform Diagnostics and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329

Ping an IPv4 Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Send an IPv4 Traceroute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Enable Remote Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Appendix A Configuration Examples

Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

VLAN Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Access Control Lists (ACLs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337

MAC ACL Sample Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Standard IP ACL Sample Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Differentiated Services (DiffServ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339

Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

DiffServ Traffic Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Creating Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

DiffServ Example Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

802.1X Access Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

User Manual8

802.1X Example Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346

MSTP Example Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Appendix B Specifications and Default Settings

Switch Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

General Feature Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352

System Setup and Maintenance Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358

Port Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358

Traffic Control Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359

Quality of Service Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359

Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360

System Management Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360

Settings for Other Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361

Hardware Technical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361

1Get Started

This user manual describes how you can configure and operate the NETGEAR S350 Series

8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch by using the local browser–based

management interface.

The manual describes the software configuration procedures and explains the options that are

available within those procedures for the following models:

• GS308T. S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch

• GS310TP. S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit PoE+ Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch with

2 SFP Ports

This chapter provides an overview of how you can start your switch and access the local

browser–based management interface.

The chapter contains the following sections:

•Available Publications

•Switch Management and Discovery Overview

•Options to Change the Default IP Address of the Switch

•Discover or Change the Switch IP Address

•About the User Interfaces

•Access the Local Browser Interface

•Navigation Tabs, Configuration Menus, and Page Menu

•Change the Language of the Local Browser Interface

•Use the Device View of the Local Browser Interface

•Interface Naming Conventions

•Configure Interface Settings

•Context-Sensitive Help and Access to the Support WebSite

•Access the User Guide Online

•Register Your Product

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Get Started User Manual10

Note: In this manual, the local browser–based management interface is

referred to as the local browser interface.

Note: For more information about the topics covered in this manual, visit the

support website at netgear.com/support.

Note: Firmware updates with new features and bug fixes are made available

from time to time at netgear.com/support/download/. Some

products can regularly check the site and download new firmware, or

you can check for and download new firmware manually. If the

features or behavior of your product does not match what is described

in this guide, you might need to update your firmware.

Available Publications

The following guides are available at netgear.com/support/download/:

•Installation Guide

•Hardware Installation Guide

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Get Started User Manual11

Switch Management and Discovery

Overview

The switch provides administrative management options that let you configure, monitor, and

control the network. Using the local browser interface, you can configure the switch and the

network, including the ports, the management VLAN, VLANs for traffic control, link

aggregation for increased bandwidth, quality of service (QoS) for prioritizing traffic, and

network security.

Initial discovery of the switch on the network requires one of the following tools:

• NETGEAR Smart Control Center (SCC) program. The SCC runs on a Windows-based

computer. You can download the SCC program from netgear.com/support/download/.

For more information about the SCC program see Discover the Switch in a Network With

a DHCP Server on page 12 and Discover the Switch in a Network Without a DHCP

Server on page 13.

• NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool. If you use a Mac computer, you can use the

NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool to discover the switch in your network and access the

local browser interface of the switch. For more information about the Switch Discovery

Tool, Use the NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool to Access the Switch on page 15.

• NETGEAR Insight mobile app. You can also install the NETGEAR Insight mobile app

on an iOS or Android mobile device and discover the IP address of the switch. For more

information about the Insight mobile app, see Use the NETGEAR Insight Mobile App to

Discover the Switch on page 16.

You can also get the IP address of the switch from the DHCP server in the network or use an

IP scanner utility.

After discovery, you can configure the switch using the local browser interface for advanced

setup and configuration of features, or the SCC program for very basic setup. For more

information, see the SCC user manual, which you can download from

netgear.com/support/download/.

Options to Change the Default IP Address

of the Switch

To enable remote management of the switch through a web browser or SNMP, connect the

switch to the network and specify an IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway. The

switch default IP address is 192.168.0.239 and the default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Get Started User Manual12

To change the default IP address of the switch, use one of the following methods:

• Dynamic assignment through DHCP. DHCP is enabled on the switch by default. If you

connect the switch to a network with a DHCP server, the switch obtains its network

information automatically. You can use the Smart Control Center to discover the

automatically assigned network information. For more information, see Discover the

Switch in a Network With a DHCP Server on page 12.

• Static assignment through the Smart Control Center. If you connect the switch to a

network that does not include a DHCP server, you can use the Smart Control Center to

assign a static IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway. For more information, see

Discover the Switch in a Network Without a DHCP Server on page 13.

• Static assignment by connecting from a local host. If you do not want to use the

Smart Control Center to assign a static address, you can connect to the switch from a

computer in the 192.168.0.0/24 network and change the settings by using the local

browser interface on the switch. For information about how to set the IP address on the

computer so that it is in the same subnet as the default IP address of the switch, see

Configure a Static IP Address From a Directly Connected Computer on page 16.

Discover or Change the Switch IP Address

The following sections describe methods that let you discover or change the IP address of

the switch.

Discover the Switch in a Network With a DHCP Server

This section describes how to set up your switch in a network that includes a DHCP server.

The DHCP client on the switch is enabled by default. When you connect the switch to your

network, the DHCP server automatically assigns an IP address to the switch. Use the Smart

Control Center (SCC) to discover the IP address automatically assigned to the switch.

Note: For more information about the SCC program, see the SCC user

manual, which you can download by visiting

netgear.com/support/download/.

To install the switch in a network with a DHCP server:

1. Connect the switch to a network with a DHCP server.

2. Power on the switch by connecting its power cord.

3. Install the Smart Control Center on your computer.

4. Start the Smart Control Center.

5. Click the Discover button for the Smart Control Center to discover all the devices in the

subnet.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Get Started User Manual13

6. Make a note of the displayed IP address assigned by the DHCP server.

You can use this IP address later to access the switch directly from a web browser (that

is, without using the Smart Control Center).

7. Select your switch by clicking the line that displays the switch.

8. Click the Web Browser Access button.

The Smart Control Center launches a browser that displays the login page of the selected

device.

Use your web browser to manage your switch. The default password is password. For

more information about the page layout and options, see Navigation Tabs, Configuration

Menus, and Page Menu on page 21.

Discover the Switch in a Network Without a DHCP Server

This section describes how to use the Smart Control Center (SCC) to set up your switch in a

network without a DHCP server. If your network does not include a DHCP service, you must

assign a static IP address to your switch.

If you prefer, you can assign the switch a static IP address even if your network does include

a DHCP server.

Note: For more information about the SCC program, see the SCC user

manual, which you can download by visiting

netgear.com/support/download/.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Get Started User Manual14

To assign a static IP address:

1. Connect the switch to your existing network.

2. Power on the switch by connecting its power cord.

3. Install the Smart Control Center on your computer.

4. Start the Smart Control Center.

5. Click the Discover button for the Smart Control Center to find your switch.

The utility broadcasts Layer 2 discovery packets within the broadcast domain to discover

the switch.

6. Select the switch, and then click the Configure Device button.

The page expands to display additional fields at the bottom.

7. Select the Disabled radio button.

DHCP is disabled.

8. Enter the static switch IP address, gateway IP address, and subnet mask for the switch.

9. Type your password to continue with the configuration change.

Tip: You must enter the current password each time that you use the

Smart Control Center to update the switch settings. The default

password is password.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Get Started User Manual15

Use the NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool to Access the

Switch

For easiest access, we recommend that you cable the switch to a network with a router or

DHCP server that assigns IP addresses, power on the switch, and then use a computer that

is connected to the same network as the switch.

The NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool lets you discover the switch in your network and

access the local browser interface of the switch from a Mac or a 64-bit Windows-based

computer.

To install the NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool, discover the switch in your network,

and access the local browser interface of the switch:

1. Download the Switch Discovery Tool by visiting

netgear.com/support/product/netgear-switch-discovery-tool.aspx.

Depending on the computer that you are using, download either the Mac version or the

version for a 64-bit Windows-based computer.

2. Temporarily disable the firewall, Internet security, antivirus programs, or all of these on the

computer that you use to configure the switch.

3. Unzip the Switch Discovery Tool files, double-click the .exe or .dmg file (for example,

NETGEAR+Switch+Discovery+Tool+Setup+1.2.101.exe or

NetgearSDT-V1.2.101.dmg), and install the program on your computer.

The installation process places a NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool icon on your

desktop.

4. Reenable the security services on your computer.

5. Power on the switch.

The DHCP server assigns the switch an IP address.

6. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection. The computer and the switch must be on the

same Layer 2 network.

7. Open the Switch Discovery Tool.

To open the program, double-click the NETGEAR Switch Discovery Tool icon on your

desktop.

The initial page displays a menu and a button.

8. From the Choose a connection menu, select the network connection that allows the Switch

Discovery Tool to access the switch.

9. Click the Start Searching button.

The Switch Discovery Tool displays a list of Smart Managed Plus Switches that it

discovers on the selected network.

For each switch, the tool displays the IP address.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Get Started User Manual16

10. To access the local browser interface of the switch, click the ADMIN PAGE button.

The login page of the local browser interface opens.

11. Enter the switch password.

The default password is password. The password is case-sensitive.

The Switch Information page displays.

Use the NETGEAR Insight Mobile App to Discover the

Switch

If the switch is connected to a WiFi router or access point, the NETGEAR Insight mobile app

lets you discover the switch in your network.

To use the NETGEAR Insight mobile app to discover the switch in your network:

1. On your iOS or Android mobile device, go to the app store, search for NETGEAR

Insight, and download and install the app.

2. Connect your mobile device to the WiFi network of the WiFi router or access point to which

the switch is connected.

3. Open the NETGEAR Insight mobile app.

4. Select LOG IN to log in to your existing NETGEAR account or tap the CREATE NETGEAR

ACCOUNT button to create a new account.

After you log in to your account, the IP address of the switch displays in the device list.

5. Write down the IP address for future use.

Configure a Static IP Address From a Directly Connected

Computer

If you do not want to use the Smart Control Center to configure the network information on

the switch, you can change the IP address of the switch by connecting an Ethernet cable

from a computer to the switch.The IP address of the computer must be in the same subnet as

the default IP address on the switch. For most networks, this means that you must change

the IP address of the computer to be on the same subnet as the default IP address of the

switch (192.168.0.239).

To configure a static IP address on the switch:

1. Change the IP settings of your computer to be in the same subnet as the IP settings of

the switch.

If the DHCP client of the switch is enabled and you remove the switch from the network

with the DHCP server, the IP address reverts to the default IP address of 192.168.0.239

with a subnet of 255.255.255.0.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Get Started User Manual17

Note: If you already disabled the DHCP client and assigned a static IP

address to the switch, change the IP settings of your computer to be in

the same subnet as the static IP address.

For more information about changing the IP settings on your computer, see one of the

following knowledge base articles at the NETGEAR website:

• Windows-based computer. See the following article:

https://kb.netgear.com/27476/How-to-set-a-static-IP-address-in-Windows

• Mac. See the following article:

https://kb.netgear.com/000037250/Setting-a-static-IP-address-on-your-network-a

dapter-in-Mac-OS-for-direct-access-to-an-access-point

(The Mac article is written for an access point but is also valid for a switch.)

2. Connect your computer to the switch using an Ethernet cable.

3. Power on the switch by connecting its power cord.

4. Launch a web browser.

5. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you did not disable the DHCP client and assigned a static IP address to the switch,

enter 192.168.0.239.

The login window opens.

6. If the browser does not display the login window, do the following:

•Your browser might display a security message and might not let you proceed.

Consider the following examples:

- Google Chrome. If Google Chrome displays a Your connection is not private

message, click the ADVANCED link. Then, click the Proceed to x.x.x.x (unsafe)

link, in which x.x.x.x represents the IP address of the switch.

- Mozilla Firefox. If Mozilla Firefox displays a Your connection is not secure

message, click the ADVANCED button. Then, click the Add Exception button. In

the pop-up window that opens, click the Confirm Security Exception button.

- Microsoft Internet Explorer. If Microsoft Internet Explorer displays a There is a

problem with this website’s security certificate message, click the Continue to

this website (not recommended) link.

- Apple Safari. If Apple Safari displays a This connection is not private message,

click the Show Details button. Then, click the visit this website link. If a warning

pop-up window opens, click the Visit Website button. If another pop-up window

opens to let you confirm changes to your certificate trust settings, enter your Mac

password and click the Update Setting button.

•Make sure that the switch is receiving power and that its Power LED is lit.

•Close and reopen the browser.

7. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Get Started User Manual18

The System Information page displays.

8. Select System > Management > IP Configuration.

The IP Configuration page displays.

9. Select the Static IP Address radio button.

10. Configure the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway to be assigned to the switch.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Disconnect the Ethernet cable and return the network configuration on your computer to the

original settings.

About the User Interfaces

The switch software includes a set of comprehensive management functions for configuring

and monitoring the system by using one of the following methods:

•Local browser interface (which used to be referred to as the web interface)

•Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

Each of the standards-based management methods allows you to configure and monitor the

components of the switch software. The method you use to manage the system depends on

your network size and requirements, and on your preference.

This manual describes how to use the local browser interface to manage and monitor the

system.

Software Requirements to Use the Local Browser Interface

To access the switch by using a web browser, the browser must meet the following software

requirements:

•HTML version 4.0, or later

•HTTP version 1.1, or later

Supported Web Browsers

The following browsers were tested and support the local browser interface. Later browser

versions might function fine but were not tested. The supported web browsers include the

following:

•Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE) version 11

•Microsoft Edge

•Mozilla Firefox version 50

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Get Started User Manual19

•Chrome version 51

•Safari on Windows OS versions 5.1

•Safari on MAC OS X version 10.1

Access the Local Browser Interface

You must be able to ping the IP address of the switch from your computer for web access to

be available. If you used the Smart Control Center to set up the IP address and subnet mask,

either with or without a DHCP server, use that IP address in the address field of your web

browser. If you did not change the IP address of the switch from the default value, enter

192.168.0.239 in the address field.

You can use one of the following methods to access the switch local browser interface:

•From the Smart Control Center, select the switch and click the Web Browser Access

button.

•From the Switch Discovery Tool, select the switch and click the ADMIN PAGE button.

•Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the switch in the address field.

If you use any of these methods, the switch Login window displays.

To access the switch local browser interface from a web browser:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

The login window opens.

4. If the browser does not display the login window, do the following:

•Your browser might display a security message and might not let you proceed.

Consider the following examples:

-Google Chrome. If Google Chrome displays a Your connection is not private

message, click the ADVANCED link. Then, click the Proceed to x.x.x.x (unsafe)

link, in which x.x.x.x represents the IP address of the switch.

- Mozilla Firefox. If Mozilla Firefox displays a Your connection is not secure

message, click the ADVANCED button. Then, click the Add Exception button. In

the pop-up window that opens, click the Confirm Security Exception button.

- Microsoft Internet Explorer. If Microsoft Internet Explorer displays a There is a

problem with this website’s security certificate message, click the Continue to

this website (not recommended) link.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Get Started User Manual20

- Apple Safari. If Apple Safari displays a This connection is not private message,

click the Show Details button. Then, click the visit this website link. If a warning

pop-up window opens, click the Visit Website button. If another pop-up window

opens to let you confirm changes to your certificate trust settings, enter your Mac

password and click the Update Setting button.

•If you use a wired Ethernet connection, make sure that the computer is connected to

the same network that the switch is attached to or directly to one of the LAN Ethernet

ports of the switch.

•If you use a mobile device, make sure that mobile device is connected to an access

point that is attached to the same network that the switch is connected to or that the

access point is directly attached to one of the LAN Ethernet ports of the switch.

•Make sure that the switch is receiving power and that its Power LED is lit.

•Close and reopen the browser.

5. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

The following figure shows the layout of the local browser interface.

Navigation tabs

Configuration menus Logout button

Buttons

Page menu

Configuration status and options

Help page

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Get Started User Manual21

Navigation Tabs, Configuration Menus, and Page Menu

The navigation tabs along the top of the local browser interface give you quick access to the

various switch functions. The tabs are always available and remain constant, regardless of

which feature you configure.

When you select a tab, the features for that tab appear as menus directly under the tabs. The

configuration menus in the blue bar change according to the navigation tab that is selected.

The configuration pages for each feature are available as submenu links in the page menu

on the left side of the page. Some items in the menu expand to reveal multiple submenu

links, as the following figure shows.

Link

Submenu

links

Configuration and Status Options

The area directly under the configuration menus and to the right of the links displays the

configuration information or status for the page you select. On pages that contain

configuration options, you might be able to enter information into fields, select options from

menus, select check boxes, and select radio buttons.

Each page contains access to the HTML-based help that explains the fields and

configuration options for the page.

Buttons in the Local Browser Interface

Each page also contains command buttons. The following table shows the command buttons

that are used throughout the pages in the local browser interface:

Table 1. Command buttons in the local browser interface

Button Function

Add Clicking the Add button adds the new item configured in the heading row of a table.

Apply Clicking the Apply button to save your settings. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Get Started User Manual22

User-Defined Fields

User-defined fields can contain 1 to 159 characters, unless otherwise noted on the

configuration web page. All characters can be used except for the ones stated in the following

table (unless specifically noted in a procedure for a feature).

Table 2. Invalid characters for user-defined fields

Invalid Characters for user-defined fields

\ <

/ >

* |

Change the Language of the Local Browser

Interface

By default, the language is set to Auto. You can set the language to a specific one.

To change the language of the local browser interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

The login window opens.

Cancel Clicking the Cancel button cancels the configuration on the page and resets the data on

the page to the previous values of the switch.

Delete Clicking the Delete button removes the selected item.

Update Clicking the Update button refreshes the page with the latest information from the device.

Logout Clicking the Logout button ends the session.

Table 1. Command buttons in the local browser interface (continued)

Button Function

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Get Started User Manual23

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. At the top of the page, to the left of Welcome, select a language from the language menu.

A confirmation pop-up window opens.

6. Click the OK button to confirm.

The switch restarts and you must log in again.

The language of the local browser interface is now set to the language that you selected.

Use the Device View of the Local Browser

Interface

The Device View displays the ports on the switch. This graphic tool provides an alternate way

to navigate to configuration and monitoring options. The graphic tool also provides

information about device ports, configuration and status, tables, and feature components.

To use Device View:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Device View.

The Device View page displays.

The following figure shows the Device View page for model GS310TP.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Get Started User Manual24

For model GS308T, depending upon the link status of the port, the left port LED and port

color in the Device View are either green, yellow, or black:

• Green. The port is linking at a speed of 1 Gbps.

• Yellow. The port is linking at a speed of 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps.

• Black. No link is present.

Model GS308T provides a left port LED but no right port LED.

For model GS310TP, depending on the PoE status of the port, the right port LED and port

color in the Device View are either green, yellow, or black:

•Green. The port is delivering PoE power.

• Yellow. A PoE fault occurred.

• Black. The port is not delivering PoE power.

6. Click a port to open a menu that displays statistics and configuration options.

You can select a menu option to access the page that contains the configuration or

monitoring options.

If you right-click the graphic, but do not right-click a specific port, the main menu displays.

This menu contains the same options as the navigation tabs at the top of the page.

The following figure shows the details on the Device View page for model GS310TP.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Get Started User Manual25

Right-click the specific port that you want to view or configure to see a menu that displays

statistics and configuration options. Select the menu option to access the page that

contains the configuration or monitoring options.

The system LEDs are located on the left side of the front panel.

Power LED in the Device View

The Power LED is a bicolor LED that serves as an indicator of power and diagnostic status:

• Solid green. The switch is powered on and operating normally.

• Solid yellow. The switch is booting.

• Off. Power is not supplied to the switch.

PoE Max LED in the Device View (Model GS310TP)

The PoE Max LED indicates the following status:

• Off. Sufficient (more than 7W of) PoE power is available.

• Solid yellow. Less than 7W of PoE power is available.

•Blinking yellow. At least once during the previous two minutes, less than 7W of PoE

power was available.

Interface Naming Conventions

The switch supports physical and logical interfaces. Interfaces are identified by their type and

the interface number. The physical ports are Gigabit interfaces and are numbered on the

front panel. You configure the logical interfaces by using the software.

The following table describes the naming convention for all interfaces available on the switch.

Table 3. Naming conventions for interfaces

Interface Description Example

Physical The physical ports are Gigabit Ethernet

interfaces and are numbered

sequentially starting from 1.

g1, g2, g12

Link aggregation group (LAG) LAG interfaces are logical interfaces

that are used only for bridging

functions.

l1, l2, l3

CPU management interface This is the internal switch interface

responsible for the switch base MAC

address. The interface is not

configurable and is always listed in the

MAC Address Table.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Get Started User Manual26

Configure Interface Settings

For some features that allow you to configure interface settings, you can apply the same

settings simultaneously to any of the following:

•A single port

•Multiple ports

•All ports

•A single LAG

•Multiple LAGs

•All LAGs

•Multiple ports and LAGs

•All ports and LAGs

Many of the pages that allow you to configure or view interface settings include links to

display all ports, all LAGs, or all ports and LAGs on the page.

Use these links as follows:

•To display all ports, click the 1 link.

•To display all LAGs, click the LAG link.

•To display all ports and LAGs, click the All link.

The procedures in this section describe how to select the ports and LAGs to configure. The

procedures assume that you are already logged in to the switch. If you do not know how to

To configure a single port by using the Go To Interface field:

1. Ensure that the page is displaying all ports, and not only the LAGs.

2. In the Go To Interface field, type the port number.

For example, type g4.

For more information, see Interface Naming Conventions on page 25.

3. Click the Go button.

The check box associated with the interface is selected, the row for the selected interface

is highlighted, and the interface number displays in the heading row.

4. Configure the desired settings.

5. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure a single LAG by using the Go To Interface field:

1. Click the LAG link or the All link to display the LAGs.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Get Started User Manual27

2. In the Go To Interface field, type the LAG number, for example l3.

For information, see Interface Naming Conventions on page 25.

3. Click the Go button.

The check box associated with the interface is selected, the row for the selected interface

is highlighted, and the interface number appears in the heading row.

4. Configure the desired settings.

5. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure a single port:

1. Ensure that the page is displaying all ports, and not only the LAGs.

2. Select the check box next to the port number.

The row for the selected interface is highlighted, and the interface number appears in the

heading row.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure a single LAG:

1. Click the LAG link or the All link to display the LAGs.

2. Select the check box next to the LAG number.

The row for the selected interface is highlighted, and the interface number appears in the

heading row.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure multiple ports:

1. Ensure that the page is displaying all ports, and not only the LAGs.

2. Select the check box next to each port to configure.

The row for each selected interface is highlighted.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Get Started User Manual28

To configure multiple LAGs:

1. Click the LAG link or the All link to display the LAGs.

2. Select the check box next to each LAG to configure.

The check box associated with each interface is selected, and the row for each selected

interface is highlighted.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure all ports:

1. Ensure that the page is displaying only ports, and not LAGs.

2. Select the check box in the heading row.

The check boxes for all ports are selected and the rows for all ports are highlighted.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure all LAGs:

1. Click the LAG link to display only the LAG interfaces.

2. Select the check box in the heading row.

The check box associated with every LAG is selected, and the rows for all LAGs are

highlighted.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

To configure multiple ports and LAGs:

1. Click the All link to display all ports and LAGs.

2. Select the check box associated with each port and LAG to configure.

The rows for the selected ports and LAGs are highlighted.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Get Started User Manual29

To configure all ports and LAGs:

1. Click the All link to display all ports and LAGs.

2. Select the check box in the heading row.

The check box associated with every port and LAG is selected, and the rows for all ports

and LAGs are highlighted.

3. Configure the desired settings.

4. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Context-Sensitive Help and Access to the

Support WebSite

When you log in to the switch, every page contains a link to the online help ( ) that contains

information to assist in configuring and managing the switch. The online help pages are

context sensitive. For example, if the IP Addressing page is open, the help topic for that page

displays if you click the link to the online help.

From the local browser interface, you can access the NETGEAR support website at

netgear.com/support.

To access the support website from the local browser interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Help > Support.

The Support page displays.

6. To access the NETGEAR support site for the switch, click the Apply button.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Get Started User Manual30

Access the User Guide Online

The user manual (the guide you are now reading) is available at the NETGEAR download

center at netgear.com/support/download/.

To access the user manual online from the local browser interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Help > Online Help > User Guide.

The User Guide page displays.

6. To access the NETGEAR download center, click the Apply button.

7. Enter the model number of the switch.

8. Locate the user manual on the product support web page.

To qualify for product updates and product warranty, we encourage you to register your

product. The first time you log in to the switch, you can register with NETGEAR. Registration

confirms that your email alerts work, lowers technical support resolution time, and ensures

that your shipping address accuracy. We would also like to incorporate your feedback into

future product development. We never sell or rent your email address and you can opt out of

communications at any time.

To register with NETGEAR when you are prompted, click the REGISTER NOW button. Or at

any time you can visit the NETGEAR website for registration at

https://my.netgear.com/registration/login.aspx.

You can also use the NETGEAR Insight mobile app to register your product (see Use the

NETGEAR Insight Mobile App to Discover the Switch on page 16).

2Configure System Information

This chapter contains the following sections:

•View and Configure the Switch Management Settings

•Use the Device View

•Configure PoE

•Configure SNMP

•Configure LLDP

•Configure DHCP Snooping

•Set Up PoE Timer Schedules

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual32

View and Configure the Switch

Management Settings

This section describes how to display the switch status and specify some basic switch

information, such as the local browser interface IP address, system clock settings, and DNS

information. The following sections describe how you can configure the switch management

settings:

•View or Define System Information on page 32

•View the System CPU Status on page 34

•Configure the IP Network and VLAN Settings for the Local Browser Interface on

page 37

•Configure the Time Settings on page 39

•Configure Denial of Service Settings on page 53

•Configure DNS Settings on page 56

•Configure Green Ethernet Settings on page 60

View or Define System Information

When you log in, the System Information page displays. You can configure and view general

device information.

To view or define system information:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual33

5. Define the following fields:

• System Name. Enter the name to identify this switch. You can use up to 255

alphanumeric characters. The default is blank.

• System Location. Enter the location of this switch. You can use up to 255

alphanumeric characters. The default is blank.

• System Contact. Enter the contact person for this switch. You can use up to 255

alphanumeric characters. The default is blank.

6. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the status information that the System Information page

displays.

Table 4. System Information

Field Description

Product Name The product name of this switch.

Serial Number The serial number of the switch.

System Object OID The base object ID for the switch's enterprise MIB.

Date & Time The current date and time.

System Up Time The time in days, hours, and minutes since the last switch reboot.

Base Mac Address Universally assigned hardware address of the switch.

View the Software Versions

You can view the software versions that are running on the switch.

To view the software versions:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual34

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Scroll down to the Versions section.

6. To refresh the page, click the Update button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed in the Versions

section of the System Information page.

Table 5. Versions information

Field Description

Model Name The model name of the switch.

Boot Version The version of the bootloader software of the switch.

Software Version The version number of the software that is running on the switch.

View the System CPU Status

You can monitor the CPU, memory resources, and utilization patterns across various

intervals to assess the performance, load, and stability settings of the switch.

To view the system CPU status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual35

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > System CPU Status > System CPU Status.

The CPU Utilization section shows the memory information, task-related information, and

percentage of CPU utilization per task.

The following table describes CPU Memory Status information.

Table 6. CPU Memory Status information

Field Description

Total System Memory The total memory of the switch in KBytes.

Available Memory The available memory space for the switch in KBytes.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual36

Configure the CPU Thresholds

The CPU Utilization Threshold notification feature allows you to configure thresholds that,

when exceeded, trigger a notification. The notification occurs through SNMP trap and syslog

messages.

To configure the CPU thresholds:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > System CPU Status > CPU Threshold.

6. Specify the thresholds:

• Rising Threshold. Notification is generated when the total CPU utilization exceeds

this threshold value over the configured time period. The range is 1 to 100.

• Rising Interval. This utilization monitoring time period can be configured from 5 to

86400 seconds in multiples of 5 seconds.

• Falling Threshold. Notification is triggered when the total CPU utilization falls below

this level for a configured period of time.

The falling utilization threshold must be equal to or less than the rising threshold

value. The falling utilization threshold notification is sent only if a rising threshold

notification was sent previously. Configuring the falling utilization threshold and time

period is optional. If the Falling CPU utilization settings are not configured, the switch

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual37

uses the same values as the values that are used for the Rising CPU utilization. The

range is 1 to 100.

• Falling Interval. The utilization monitoring time period can be configured from

5 seconds to 86400 seconds in multiples of 5 seconds.

• Free Memory Threshold. The free memory threshold value for the CPU in KB.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure the IP Network and VLAN Settings for the

Local Browser Interface

You can configure network information for the local browser interface, which is the logical

interface used for in-band connectivity with the switch through any of the switch’s front-panel

ports. The configuration settings associated with the switch’s network interface do not affect

the configuration of the front panel ports through which traffic is switched or routed.

To configure the IP network and VLAN settings for the local browser interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > IP Configuration.

The IP Configuration page displays.

6. Select one of the following radio buttons to specify how the network information for the

switch must be configured:

• Static IP Address. Specifies that the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway

must be manually configured. Enter this information in the fields below this radio

button.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual38

• Dynamic IP Address (BOOTP). Specifies that the switch must obtain the IP address

through a BootP server.

• Dynamic IP Address (DHCP). Specifies that the switch must obtain the IP address

through a DHCP server.

7. If you select the Static IP Address radio button, configure the following network information:

• IP Address. The IP address of the network interface. The default value is

192.168.0.239. Each part of the IP address must start with a number other than zero.

For example, IP addresses 001.100.192.6 and 192.001.10.3 are not valid.

• Subnet Mask. The IP subnet mask for the interface. The default value is

255.255.255.0.

• Default Gateway. The default gateway for the IP interface. The default value is

192.168.0.254.

8. Specify the VLAN ID for the management VLAN.

The management VLAN is used to establish an IP connection to the switch from a

workstation that is connected to a port in the same VLAN. If not specified, the active

management VLAN ID is 1 (default), which allows an IP connection to be established

through any port.

When the management VLAN is set to a different value, an IP connection can be made

only through a port that is part of the management VLAN. Also, the port VLAN ID (PVID)

of the port to be connected in that management VLAN must be the same as the

management VLAN ID.

Note: Make sure that the VLAN that must be the management VLAN exists.

Also make sure that the PVID of at least one port in the VLAN is the

same as the management VLAN ID. For information about creating

VLANs and configuring the PVID for a port, see Configure VLANs on

page 111.

The following requirements apply to the management VLAN:

•Only one management VLAN can be active at a time.

•When a new management VLAN is configured, connectivity through the existing

management VLAN is lost.

•The management station must be reconnected to the port in the new management

VLAN.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual39

Configure the Time Settings

The switch supports the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). As its name suggests, it is a

less complicated version of Network Time Protocol, which is a system for synchronizing the

clocks of networked computer systems, primarily when data transfer is handled through the

Internet. You can also set the system time manually.

Configure the Time Setting Manually

You can view and adjust date and time settings.

To manually configure the time setting:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > Time Configuration.

6. Select the Clock Source Local radio button.

7. In the Date field, specify the current date by entering the month, day, and year

(MM/DD/YYYY).

8. In the Time field, specify the current time by entering in hours, minutes, and seconds

(HH:MM:SS).

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual40

Note: If you do not enter a date and time, the switch calculates the date and

time using the CPU’s clock cycle.

9. In the Time Zone Name field, specify the acronym for a time zone.

You can also specify the number of hours and number of minutes that the time zone is

different from the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The time zone can affect the

display of the current system time. The default value is UTC.

Note: When using SNTP/NTP time servers to update the switch’s clock, the

time data received from the server is based on the UTC, which is the

same as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This might not be the time

zone in which the switch is located.

10. In the Offset Hours field, specify the number of hours that the time zone is different from the

UTC.

For more information see the description for Time Zone Name in Step 9. The allowed

range is –12 to 13. The default value is 0.

11. In the Offset Minutes field, specify the number of minutes that the time zone is different

from UTC.

For more information see the description for Time Zone Name in Step 9. The allowed

range is 0 to 59. The default value is 0.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure the Time Settings With SNTP and Configure the Global SNTP

Settings

To configure the time by using SNTP and configure the global SNTP settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual41

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > Time Configuration.

The Time Configuration page displays.

6. Select the Clock Source SNTP radio button.

The local clock can be set to SNTP only if the following two conditions are met:

•An SNTP server is configured.

•The switch can contact the SNTP server.

7. Next to Client Mode, select the mode of operation of the SNTP client:

• Unicast. SNTP operates in a point-to-point fashion. A unicast client sends a request

to a designated server at its unicast address and expects a reply from which it can

determine the time and, optionally, the round-trip delay and local clock offset relative

to the server.

• Broadcast. SNTP operates in the same manner as multicast mode but uses a local

broadcast address instead of a multicast address. The broadcast address provides a

single-subnet scope while a multicast address provides an Internet-wide scope.

The default value is Unicast.

8. If the SNTP client mode is Unicast, use the SNTP Server Configuration page to add the IP

address or DNS name of one or more SNTP servers for the switch to poll.

For more information, see Configure an SNTP Server on page 44.

9. In the Port field, specify the local UDP port that the SNTP client receives server packets on.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual42

The allowed range is 1025 to 65535 and 123. The default value is 123. When the default

value is configured, the actual client port value used in SNTP packets is assigned by the

switch.

10. In the Unicast Poll Interval field, specify the number of seconds between unicast poll

requests expressed as a power of 2. The allowed range is 6 to 10. The default value is 6.

11. In the Broadcast Poll Interval field, specify the number of seconds between broadcast poll

requests expressed as a power of 2.

Broadcasts received prior to the expiry of this interval are discarded. The allowed range is

6 to 10. The default value is 6.

12. In the Unicast Poll Timeout field, specify the number of seconds to wait for an SNTP

response to a unicast poll request.

The allowed range is 1 to 30. The default value is 5.

13. In the Unicast Poll Retry field, specify the number of times to retry a unicast poll request to

an SNTP server after the first time-out before the switch attempts to use the next configured

server.

The allowed range is 0 to 10. The default value is 1.

14. In the Time Configuration section (above the SNTP Global Configuration section),

configure the following settings:

a. In the Time Zone Name field, specify the acronym for a time zone.

You can also specify the number of hours and number of minutes that the time zone

is different from the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The time zone can affect the

display of the current system time. The default value is UTC.

Note: When using SNTP/NTP time servers to update the switch’s clock, the

time data received from the server is based on the UTC, which is the

same as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This might not be the time

zone in which the switch is located.

b. In the Offset Hours field, specify the number of hours that the time zone is different

from the UTC.

For more information see the description for Time Zone Name in Step a. The allowed

range is –12 to 13. The default value is 0.

c. In the Offset Minutes field, specify the number of minutes that the time zone is

different from UTC.

For more information see the description for Time Zone Name in Step a. The allowed

range is 0 to 59. The default value is 0.

15. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual43

View the SNTP Global Status

When you select the SNTP option as the clock source, you can view the SNTP global status.

To view the SNTP global status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > Time Configuration.

6. Make sure that the Clock Source SNTP radio button is selected.

The SNTP Global Status section displays below the SNTP Global Configuration section.

7. Click the Update button to update the page with the latest information about the switch.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual44

The following table displays the nonconfigurable SNTP Global Status information.

Table 7. SNTP Global Status information

Field Description

Version The SNTP version that the client supports.

Supported mode The SNTP modes that the client supports. Multiple modes can be supported by a client.

Last Update Time The local date and time (UTC) that the SNTP client last updated the system clock.

Last Attempt T ime The local date and time (UTC) of the last SNTP request or receipt of an unsolicited

message.

Last Attempt Status The status of the last SNTP request or unsolicited message for both unicast and

broadcast modes. If no message was received from a server, a status of Other is

displayed. These values are appropriate for all operational modes.

• Other. The status of the last request is unknown.

• Success. The SNTP operation was successful and the system time was updated.

• Request Timed Out. After an SNTP request was sent to an SNTP server, the

response timer expired before a response from the server was received.

• Bad

Date Encoded. The time provided by the SNTP server is not valid.

• Version

Not Supported. The SNTP version supported by the server is not

compatible with the version supported by the client.

• Server Unsynchronized. The SNTP server is not synchronized with its peers. This

is indicated by the leap indicator field in the SNTP message.

Server IP Address The IP address of the server for the last received valid packet. If no message was

received from any server, an empty string is shown.

Address Type The address type of the SNTP server address for the last received valid packet.

Server Stratum The claimed stratum of the server for the last received valid packet.

Reference Clock ID The reference clock identifier of the server for the last received valid packet.

Server mode The mode of the server for the last received valid packet.

Unicast Server Max

Entries The maximum number of unicast server entries that can be configured on this client.

Unicast Server

Current Entries The number of current valid unicast server entries configured for this client.

Broadcast Count The number of unsolicited broadcast SNTP messages that were received and processed

by the SNTP client since the last reboot.

Configure an SNTP Server

SNTP assures accurate network device clock time synchronization up to the millisecond.

Time synchronization is performed by a network SNTP server. The switch operates only as

an SNTP client and cannot provide time services to other systems.

Time sources are established by strata. Strata define the accuracy of the reference clock.

The higher the stratum (where zero is the highest), the more accurate the clock. The device

receives time from Stratum 1 and above since it is itself a Stratum 2 device.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual45

The following is an example of strata:

• Stratum 0. A real-time clock is used as the time source, for example, a GPS system.

• Stratum 1. A server that is directly linked to a Stratum 0 time source is used. Stratum 1

time servers provide primary network time standards.

• Stratum 2. The time source is distanced from the Stratum 1 server over a network path.

For example, a Stratum 2 server receives the time over a network link, through NTP, from

a Stratum 1 server.

Information received from SNTP servers is evaluated based on the time level and server

type.

SNTP time definitions are assessed and determined by the following time levels:

•T1. Time that the original request was sent by the client.

•T2. Time that the original request was received by the server.

•T

3. Time that the server sent a reply.

•T

4. Time that the client received the server's reply.

The device can poll unicast server types for the server time.

Polling for unicast information is used for polling a server for which the IP address is known.

SNTP servers that were configured on the device are the only ones that are polled for

synchronization information. T1 through T4 are used to determine server time. This is the

preferred method for synchronizing device time because it is the most secure method. If this

method is selected, SNTP information is accepted only from SNTP servers defined on the

device using the SNTP Server Configuration page.

The device retrieves synchronization information, either by actively requesting information or

at every poll interval.

You can view and modify information for adding and modifying Simple Network Time

Protocol SNTP servers.

Add an SNTP Server

To add an SNTP server:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual46

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > SNTP Server Configuration.

The SNTP Server Configuration page displays.

6. From the Server Type menu, select the type of SNTP address to enter in the address field.

The address can be either an IP address (IPv4) or a host name (DNS).

7. In the Address field, specify the IP address or the host name of the SNTP server.

This is a text string of up to 64 characters, containing the encoded unicast IP address or

host name of an SNTP server. Unicast SNTP requests are sent to this address. If this

address is a DNS host name, then that host name is resolved into an IP address each

time an SNTP request is sent to it.

8. If the UDP port on the SNTP server to which SNTP requests are sent is not the standard

port (123), specify the port number in the Port field.

The range is from 1 to 65535. The default value is 123.

9. In the Priority field, specify the priority order which to query the servers.

The SNTP client on the device continues sending SNTP requests to different servers until

a successful response is received, or all servers are exhausted. The priority indicates the

order in which to query the servers. The request is sent to an SNTP server with a priority

value of 1 first, then to a server with a priority value of 2, and so on. If any servers are

assigned the same priority, the SNTP client contacts the servers in the order that they

appear in the table. The range is from 1 to 3. The default value is 1.

10. In the Version field, specify the NTP version running on the server.

The range is 1 to 4. The default value is 4.

11. Click the Add button.

The SNTP server entry is added.

12. Repeat the previous steps to add additional SNTP servers.

You can configure up to three SNTP servers.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual47

The SNTP Server Status table displays status information about the SNTP servers

configured on your switch. The following table describes the SNTP Server Global Status

information.

Table 8. SNTP Server Status information

Field Description

Address All the existing server addresses. If no server configuration exists, a message stating

that no SNTP server exists displays on the page.

Last Update Time The local date and time (UTC) that the response from this server was used to update

the system clock.

Last Attempt T ime The local date and time (UTC) that this SNTP server was last queried.

Last Attempt Status The status of the last SNTP request or unsolicited message for both unicast and

broadcast modes. If no message was received from a server, a status of Other is

displayed. These values are appropriate for all operational modes:

• Other. The status of the last request is unknown, or no SNTP responses were

received.

• Success. The SNTP operation was successful and the system time was updated.

• Request Timed Out. After an SNTP request was sent to an SNTP server, the

response timer expired before a response from the server was received.

• Bad

Date Encoded. The time provided by the SNTP server is not valid.

• Version Not Supported. The SNTP version supported by the server is not

compatible with the version supported by the client.

• Server Unsynchronized. The SNTP server is not synchronized with its peers. This

is indicated by the leap indicator field on the SNTP message.

• Server

Kiss Of Death. The SNTP server indicated that no further queries were to

be sent to this server. This is indicated by a stratum field equal to 0 in a message

received from a server.

Requests The number of SNTP requests made to this server since last agent reboot.

Failed Requests The number of failed SNTP requests made to this server since the last reboot.

Change the Settings for an Existing SNTP Server

To change the settings for an existing SNTP server:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual48

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > SNTP Server Configuration.

The SNTP Server Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the configured server.

7. Specify new values in the available fields.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove an SNTP Server

To remove an SNTP server:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > SNTP Server Configuration.

The SNTP Server Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the configured server to remove.

7. Click the Delete button.

The entry is removed, and the device is updated.

Configure Daylight Saving Time Settings

You can configure settings for summer time, which is also known as daylight saving time.

Used in some countries around the world, summer time is the practice of temporarily

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual49

advancing clocks during the summer months. Typically clocks are adjusted forward one or

more hours near the start of spring and are adjusted backward in autumn.

To configure the daylight saving time settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > DayLight Saving Configuration.

6. Select a Daylight Saving (DST) radio button:

• Disable. Disable daylight saving time.

• Recurring. Daylight saving time occurs at the same time every year. The start and

end times and dates for the time shift must be manually configured.

• Recurring EU. The system clock uses the standard recurring summer time settings

used in countries in the European Union. When this option is selected, the rest of the

applicable fields on the page are automatically populated and cannot be edited.

• Recurring USA. The system clock uses the standard recurring daylight saving time

settings used in the United States. When this option is selected, the rest of the

applicable fields on the page are automatically populated and cannot be edited.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual50

• Non Recurring. Daylight saving time settings are in effect only between the start date

and end date of the specified year. When this option is selected, the summer time

settings do not repeat on an annual basis.

7. Depending on your selection, configure the additional fields:

•If you select the DayLight Saving (DST) Recurring, Recurring EU, or Recurring

USA radio button, the fields in the following table are visible and you must configure

them.

Table 9. Daylight saving setting is Recurring, Recurring EU, or Recurring USA

Field Description

Begins At These fields are used to configure the start values of the date and time.

• Week. Configure the start week in the month.

• Day. Configure the start day in the week.

• Month. Configure the start month.

• Hours. Configure the start hour.

• Minutes. Configure the start minutes.

Ends At These fields are used to configure the end values of date and time.

• Week. Configure the end week in the month.

• Day. Configure the end day in the week.

• Month. Configure the end month.

• Hours. Configure the end hour.

• Minutes. Configure the end minutes.

Offset Configure recurring offset in minutes. The range is from 1 to 1440 minutes.

Zone Configure the time zone.

•If you select the DayLight Saving (DST) Non Recurring radio button, the fields in the

following table are visible and you must configure them.

Table 10. Daylight saving setting is Non Recurring

Field Description

Begins At These fields are used to configure the start values of the date and time.

• Month. Configure the start month.

• Date. Configure the start date in the month.

• Year. Configure the start year.

• Hours. Configure the start hour.

• Minutes. Configure the start minutes.

Ends At These fields are used to configure the end values of date and time.

• Month. Configure the end month.

• Date. Configure the end date in the month.

• Year. Configure the end year.

• Hours. Configure the end hour.

• Minutes. Configure the end minutes.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual51

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View the DayLight Saving Time Status

The Daylight Saving (DST) Status section shows information about the summer time settings

and whether the time shift for summer time is currently in effect.

To view the daylight saving time status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > DayLight Saving Configuration.

Offset Specify the number of minutes to shift the summer time from the standard time.

The range is from 1 to 1440 minutes.

Zone Specify the acronym associated with the time zone when summer time is in

effect. This field is not validated against an official list of time zone acronyms.

Table 10. Daylight saving setting is Non Recurring (continued)

Field Description

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual52

6. To refresh the page, click the Update button.

The following table displays the nonconfigurable daylight saving status information.

Table 11. Daylight Saving (DST) Status information

Field Description

Daylight Saving (DST) The Daylight Saving value, which is one of the following:

• Disable

• Recurring

• Recurring EU

• Recurring USA

• Non Recurring

Begins At The start date of daylight saving time. This field is not displayed when

daylight saving time is disabled.

Ends At The end date of daylight saving time. This field is not displayed when

daylight saving time is disabled.

Offset (in Minutes) The offset value in minutes.This field is not displayed when daylight saving

time is disabled.

Zone The zone acronym. This field is not displayed when daylight saving time is

disabled.

Daylight Saving (DST) in Effect Indicates whether daylight saving time is in effect.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual53

Configure Denial of Service Settings

You can configure the Denial of Service (DoS) settings for the switch. The switch provides

support for classifying and blocking specific types of DoS attacks.

Configure Auto-DoS

You can automatically enable all the DoS features available on the switch, except for the L4

Port attack. For information about the types of DoS attacks the switch can monitor and block,

see Configure Denial of Service on page 53.

To enable the Auto-DoS feature:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Denial of Service > Auto-DoS Configuration.

The Auto-DoS Configuration page displays.

6. Select the Auto-DoS Mode Enable radio button.

When an attack is detected, a warning message is logged to the buffered log and is sent

to the syslog server. At the same time, the port is shut down and can be enabled only

manually by the admin user.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Denial of Service

You can select which types of DoS attacks the switch monitors and blocks.

To configure individual DoS settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual54

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Denial of Service > Denial of Service Configuration.

6. Select the types of DoS attacks for the switch to monitor and block and configure any

associated values:

• Denial of Service Min TCP Header Size. Specify the minimum TCP header size

allowed. If DoS TCP Fragment is enabled, the switch drops packets with a TCP

header smaller than the configured value. The default value is 20.

• Denial of Service Max ICMPv4 Packet Size. Specify the maximum ICMPv4 packet

size allowed. If ICMPv4 DoS prevention is enabled, the switch drops IPv4 ICMP ping

packets with a size greater than the configured value. The default value is 512.

• Denial of Service ICMPv4. Enabling ICMPv4 DoS prevention causes the switch to

drop ICMPv4 packets with a type set to ECHO_REQ (ping) and a size greater than

the configured ICMPv4 packet size.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual55

• Denial of Service Ping of Death. Enabling Ping of Death DoS prevention causes the

switch to drop ICMP ping packet that are larger than 65535 bytes.

• Denial of Service ICMP Fragment. Enabling ICMP Fragment DoS prevention

causes the switch to drop ICMP fragmented packets.

• Denial of Service Smurf. Enabling Smurf DoS prevention causes the switch to drop

broadcast ICMP echo request packet.

• Denial of Service SIP=DIP. Enabling SIP=DIP DoS prevention causes the switch to

drop packets with a source IP address equal to the destination IP address.

• Denial of Service SMAC=DMAC. Enabling SMAC=DMAC DoS prevention causes

the switch to drop packets with a source MAC address equal to the destination MAC

address.

• Denial of Service TCP FIN&URG&PSH. Enabling TCP FIN & URG & PSH DoS

prevention causes the switch to drop packets with TCP flags FIN, URG, and PSH set

and the TCP sequence number equal to 0.

• Denial of Service TCP Flag&Sequence. Enabling TCP Flag DoS prevention causes

the switch to drop packets with TCP control flags set to 0 and the TCP sequence

number set to 0.

• Denial of Service TCP Fragment. Enabling TCP Fragment DoS prevention causes

the switch to drop packets with a TCP payload for which the IP payload length minus

the IP header size is less than the minimum allowed TCP header size.

• Denial of Service TCP Offset. Enabling TCP Offset DoS prevention causes the

switch to drop packets with a TCP header offset set to 1.

• Denial of Service TCP Port. Enabling TCP Port DoS prevention causes the switch to

drop packets for which the TCP source port is equal to the TCP destination port.

• Denial of Service TCP Source Port. Enabling TCP Source Port DoS prevention

causes the switch to drop packets for which the TCP source port number is lower

than 1024.

• Denial of Service TCP SYN&FIN. Enabling TCP SYN & FIN DoS prevention causes

the switch to drop packets with TCP flags SYN and FIN set.

• Denial of Service TCP SYN&RST. Enabling TCP SYN & RST DoS prevention

causes the switch to drop packets with TCP flags SYN and RST set.

• Denial of Service UDP Port. Enabling UDP Port DoS prevention causes the switch

to drop packets for which the UDP source port is equal to the UDP destination port.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual56

Configure DNS Settings

You can configure information about DNS servers that the network uses and how the switch

operates as a DNS client.

Configure Global DNS Settings and Add a DNS Server

You can configure global DNS settings and DNS server information.

To configure the global DNS settings and add a DNS server:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > DNS > DNS Configuration.

6. Select the Disable or Enable radio button to specify whether to disable or enable the

administrative status of the DNS client.

• Enable. Allows the switch to send DNS queries to a DNS server to resolve a DNS

domain name. The DNS is enabled by default.

•Disable. Prevents the switch from sending DNS queries.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual57

7. In the DNS Default Name field, enter the default DNS domain name to include in DNS

queries.

When the system is performing a lookup on an unqualified host name, this field is

provides the domain name (for example, if default domain name is netgear.com and the

user enters test, then test is changed to test.netgear .com to resolve the name). The name

must not be longer than 255 characters.

8. In the DNS Server field, specify the IPv4 address to which the switch sends DNS queries.

9. Click the Add button.

The server is added to the list. You can specify up to eight DNS servers. The Preference

field displays the server preference order. The preference is set in the order in which

preferences were entered.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table displays DNS Server Configuration information.

Table 12. DNS Server Configuration information

Field Description

ID The identification of the DNS Server.

Preference Shows the preference of the DNS server. The preferences are

determined by the order in which they were entered.

Remove a DNS Server

You can remove a DNS server that you no longer need.

To remove a DNS server:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual58

5. Select System > Management > DNS > DNS Configuration.

6. In the DNS Server Configuration table, select the check box for the DNS server.

Note: If you do not select a DNS server, all the DNS servers are removed

after you click the Delete button.

7. Click the Delete button.

The DNS server is removed.

Configure and View Host Name-to-IP Address Information

You can manually map host names to IP addresses or view dynamic host mappings.

Add a Static Entry to the Dynamic Host Mapping Table

To add a static entry to the local dynamic host mapping table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > DNS > Host Configuration.

The DNS Host Configuration page displays.

6. In the Host Name (1 to 255 characters) field, specify the static host name to add.

Its length cannot exceed 255 characters and it is a required field.

7. In the IPv4 Address field, enter the IP address to associate with the host name.

8. Click the Add button.

Your settings are saved. The entry displays in the Dynamic Host Mapping table.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual59

Remove an Entry From the Dynamic Host Mapping Table

To remove an entry from the Dynamic Host Mapping table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > DNS > Host Configuration.

The DNS Host Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the entry to remove.

7. Click the Delete button.

The entry is removed from the Dynamic Host Mapping table.

Change the Host Name or IP Address in an Entry of the Dynamic Host Mapping Table, View

All Entries, or Clear All Entries

To change the host name or IP address in an entry of the Dynamic Host Mapping table,

view all entries, or clear all entries

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual60

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > DNS > Host Configuration.

The DNS Host Configuration page display.

6. Select the check box next to the entry to update.

7. Enter the new information in the appropriate field.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

9. To clear all the dynamic host name entries from the list, click the Clear button.

The Dynamic Host Mapping table shows host name-to-IP address entries that the switch

learned. The following table describes the dynamic host fields.

Table 13. Dynamic Host Mapping information

Field Description

Host Lists the host name that you assign to the specified IP address.

Total Time since the dynamic entry was first added to the table.

Elapsed Time since the dynamic entry was last updated.

Type The type of the dynamic entry.

Addresses Lists the IP address associated with the host name.

Configure Green Ethernet Settings

You can configure the green Ethernet features to reduce power consumption.

To configure the Green Ethernet settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual61

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet Configuration.

6. Select the Auto Power Down Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

By default, this mode is disabled. When a port link is down, the underlying physical layer

goes down for a short period and then checks for port link pulses again so that

auto-negotiation remains possible. In this way, the switch saves power when no link

partner is present for the port.

7. Select the EEE Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

By default, this mode is disabled. Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) combines the MAC

with a family of physical layers that support operation in a low power mode. It is defined

by the IEEE 802.3az standard. Lower power mode enables both the send and receive

sides of the link to disable some functionality for power savings when the load is light.

Transition to low power mode does not change the link status. Frames in transit are not

dropped or corrupted in transition to and from low power mode. Transition time is

transparent to upper layer protocols and applications.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Green Ethernet Interface Settings

You can configure Green Ethernet settings for individual interfaces.

To configure the Green Ethernet interface settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual62

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet Interface

Configuration.

6. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

7. From the Auto Power Down Mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

By default, this mode is disabled for the port. When a port link is down, the underlying

physical layer goes down for a short period and then checks for port link pulses again so

that auto-negotiation remains possible. In this way, the switch saves power when no link

partner is present for the port.

8. From the EEE mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

By default, this mode is disabled for the port. Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) combines

the MAC with a family of physical layers that support operation in a low power mode. It is

defined by the IEEE 802.3az standard. Lower power mode enables both the send and

receive sides of the link to disable some functionality for power savings when the load is

light. Transition to low power mode does not change the link status. Frames in transit are

not dropped or corrupted in transition to and from low power mode. Transition time is

transparent to upper layer protocols and applications.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual63

Use the Device View

For information about the device view, see Use the Device View of the Local Browser

Interface on page 23.

Configure PoE

On model GS310TP, you can configure the global Power over Ethernet (PoE) configuration

settings and the PoE settings for each port.

Note: For more information about PoE, see the hardware installation guide,

which you can download by visiting

netgear.com/support/download/.

Configure the Global PoE Settings

To configure the PoE settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > PoE > Basic > PoE Configuration.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual64

The previous figure shows the PoE Configuration page for model GS310TP.

6. In the System Usage Threshold field, enter a number from 1 to 99 to set the threshold level

at which a trap is sent if the consumed power exceeds the threshold power.

7. From the Power Management Mode menu, select the power management algorithm that

the switch uses to deliver power to the requesting powered devices (PDs):

• Static. Specifies that the power allocated for each port depends on the type of power

threshold configured on the port.

• Dynamic. Specifies that the power consumption on each port is measured and

calculated in real time.

8. To active the PoE traps, from the Traps menu, select Enable.

Selecting Disable deactivates the PoE traps. The default setting is Enabled.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields on the page.

Table 14. PoE Configuration fields

Field Description

Firmware Version The firmware version of the PoE firmware component.

Power Status The power status.

Total Power Available Watts The maximum amount of power in watts that the switch can deliver to all ports.

Threshold Power Watts If the consumed power is below the threshold power, the switch can power up

another port. The consumed power can be between the nominal and threshold

power. The threshold power is displayed in watts.

Note: The threshold power value is determined by the value that you enter in the

System Usage Threshold field.

Consumed Power Watts The total amount of power in watts that is being delivered to all ports.

Configure the PoE Port Settings

To configure the PoE port settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual65

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > PoE > Advanced > PoE Port Configuration.

The previous figure shows the PoE Port Configuration page for model GS310TP.

6. Select the check boxes for the ports that you want to configure or select the check box in the

heading to configure all ports.

7. From the Port Power menu, select the PoE mode of the port:

• Enable. The port’s capacity to deliver power is enabled. This is the default setting.

• Disable. The port’s capacity to deliver power is disabled.

8. From the Port Priority menu, select the priority for the port in relation to other ports if the

total power that the switch is capable of delivering exceeds the total power budget:

• Low. Low priority. This is the default setting.

•Medium. Medium priority.

• High. High priority.

• Critical. Critical priority.

The port priority determines which ports can still deliver power after the total power

delivered by the switch exceeds the total power budget. (In such a situation, the switch

might not be able to deliver power to all connected devices.) If the same priority applies to

two ports, the lower-numbered port receives higher priority.

9. From the Power Mode menu, select the PoE mode that the port must function in:

• 802.3af. The port is powered in and limited to the IEEE 802.3af mode. A PD that

requires IEEE 802.3at does not receive power if the port functions in IEEE 802.3af

mode.

•Legacy. The port is powered using high-inrush current, which is used by legacy PDs

that require more than 15W to power up.

• Pre-802.3at. The port is initially powered in the IEEE 802.3af mode and, before

75 msec pass, is switched to the high power IEEE 802.3at mode. Select this mode if

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual66

the PD does not perform Layer 2 classification or if the switch performs

2-event Layer 1 classification.

• 802.3at. The port is powered in the IEEE 802.3at mode and is backward compatible

with IEEE 802.3af. The 802.3at mode is the default mode. In this mode, if the switch

detects that the attached PD requests more power than IEEE 802.3af but is not an

IEEE 802.3at Class 4 device, the PD does not receive power from the switch.

10. From the Power Limit Type menu, select how the port controls the maximum power that it

can deliver:

• None. The port draws up to Class 0 maximum power in low power mode and up to

Class 4 maximum power in high power mode.

•Class. The port power limit is equal to the class of the attached PD.

•User. The port power limit is equal to the value that is specified in the Power Limit

(mW) field. This is the default setting.

Note: If a PD does not report its class correctly, use of these options can

preserve additional PoE power by preventing the switch from

delivering more power than the PD requires. However, depending on

which option you select, a PD that does not report its class correctly

might not power up at all.

11. In the Power Limit (mW) field, enter the maximum power (in mW) that the port can deliver.

The range is 3,000–30,000 mW. The default is 30,000 mW.

12. From the Detection Type menu, select how the port detects the attached PD:

•IEEE 802. The port performs a 4-point resistive detection. This is the default setting.

• 4pt802.3af+legacy. The port performs a 4-point resistive detection, and if required,

continues with legacy detection.

•Legacy. The port performs legacy detection.

13. From the Timer Schedule menu, select a timer schedule or select None, which is the

default selection.

For information about setting up and configuring PoE timer schedules, see Set Up PoE

Timer Schedules on page 94.

14. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields on the page.

Table 15. PoE Port Configuration

Field Description

High Power All ports supports high power mode.

Power Limit (mW) The maximum power in milliwatts that can be provided by the port.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual67

Class The class defines the range of power that a powered device (PD) is drawing from

the switch. The class definitions are as follows:

• 0: 0.44–16.2W

• 1: 0.44–4.2W

• 2: 0.44–7.4W

• 3: 0.44–16.2W

• 4: 0.44–31.6W

• Unknown. The class cannot be detected, or no PD is attached to the port.

Output Voltage (Volts) The voltage that is delivered to the PD in volts.

Output Current (mA) The current that is delivered to the PD in mA.

Output Power (mW) The power that is delivered to the PD in milliwatts.

Status The operational status of the port:

• Disabled. No power is delivered.

• Delivering Power. Power is being drawn by the PD.

• Requesting Power. The port is requesting power.

• Fault. A problem occurred with the power.

• Searching. The port is not in one of the other states in this list.

Fault Status The error description when the PoE port is in a fault state:

• No

Error. The port is not in any error state and can provide power.

• MPS Absent. The port detected the absence of the main power supply,

preventing the port from providing power.

• Short. The port detected a short circuit condition, preventing the port from

providing power.

• Overload. The PD that is connected to the port attempts to draw more power

than allowed by the port’s settings, preventing the port from providing power at

all.

• Power Denied. The port was denied power because of a shortage of power or

because of an administrative condition. In this condition, the port cannot

provide power.

• Startup Failure. The PD that is connected to the port failed to start up. In this

condition, the port does not provide power.

• Over Voltage. The port was denied power because of a over-voltage lockout.

• Under

Voltage. The port was denied power because of an under-voltage

lockout.

• Thermal

Shutdown. The port detected a thermal temperature fault, preventing

the port from providing power.

Table 15. PoE Port Configuration (continued)

Field Description

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual68

Configure SNMP

You can configure SNMP settings for SNMPv1/v2 and SNMPv3. The switch software

supports the configuration of SNMP groups and users that can manage traps that the SNMP

agent generates.

The switch uses both standard public MIBs for standard functionality and private MIBs that

support additional switch functionality. All private MIBs begin with a hyphen (-) prefix. The

main object for interface configuration is in -SWITCHING-MIB, which is a private MIB. Some

interface configurations also involve objects in the public MIB, IF-MIB.

Configure the SNMPv1/v2 Community

Only the communities that you define can access to the switch using the SNMP V1 and

SNMP V2 protocols. Only those communities with read/write level access can be used to

change the configuration using SNMP.

Add an SNMP Community:

To add an SNMP community:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Community Configuration.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual69

6. In the Management Station IP field, specify the IP address of the management station.

7. In the Management Station IP Mask field, specify the subnet mask to associate with the

management station IP address.

Together, the management station IP address and the management station IP mask

denote a range of IP addresses from which SNMP clients can use that community to

access this device. If either the management station IP address or management station

IP mask value is 0.0.0.0, access is allowed from any IP address. Otherwise, every client’s

address is ANDed with the mask, as is the management station IP address. If the values

are equal, access is allowed.

For example, if the management station IP address and management station IP mask

settings are 192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0, any client with an IP address in the range from

192.168.1.0 to 192.168.1.255 (inclusive) is allowed access. To allow access from only

one station, use a management station IP mask value of 255.255.255.255, and use that

computer’s IP address as the client address.

8. In the Community String field, specify a community name.

9. From the Access Mode menu, select the access level for this community, which is either

Read/Write or Read Only.

10. From the Status menu, select to enable or disable the community.

If you select Enable, the community name must be unique among all valid community

names or the set requests are rejected. If you select Disable, the community name

becomes invalid.

11. Click the Add button.

The selected community is added.

Modify an Existing SNMP Community

To modify an existing SNMP community:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual70

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Community Configuration.

The Community Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the community.

7. Update the desired fields.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete an SNMP Community

To delete an SNMP community:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Community Configuration.

The Community Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the community to remove.

7. Click the Delete button.

The community is removed.

Configure SNMPv1/v2 Trap Settings

You can configure settings for each SNMPv1 or SNMPv2 management host that must

receive notifications about traps generated by the device. The SNMP management host is

also known as the SNMP trap receiver.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual71

Add an SNMP Trap Receiver

To add an SNMP trap receiver:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Trap Configuration.

The Trap Configuration page displays.

6. In the Recipients IP field, enter the IPv4 address at which the SNMP traps from the switch

must be received.

7. From the Version menu, select the trap version to be used by the SNMP trap receiver.

• SNMPv1. The switch uses SNMPv1 to send traps to the receiver. The default setting

is SNMPv1.

• SNMPv2. The switch uses SNMPv2 to send traps to the receiver.

8. In the Community String field, specify the name of the SNMP community that includes

the SNMP management host and the SNMP agent on the device.

This name can be up to 16 characters and is case-sensitive.

9. From the Status menu, select Enable to send traps to the receiver or select Disable to

prevent the switch from sending traps to the receiver.

10. Click the Add button.

The receiver configuration is added.

Modify Information About an Existing SNMP Recipient

To modify information about an existing SNMP recipient:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual72

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Trap Configuration.

The Trap Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the recipient.

7. Change the fields as necessary.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete an SNMP Recipient

To delete an SNMP trap recipient:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Trap Configuration.

The Trap Configuration page displays.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual73

6. Select the check box next to the recipient to remove.

7. Click the Delete button.

The trap recipient is removed.

Configure SNMPv1/v2 Trap Flags

You can enable or disable traps that the switch can send to an SNMP manager. When the

condition identified by an active trap is encountered by the switch, a trap message is sent to

any enabled SNMP trap receivers, and a message is written to the trap log.

To configure the trap flags:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Trap Flags.

The Trap Flags page displays.

6. Enable or disable the following system traps:

• Authentication. When enabled, SNMP traps are sent when events involving

authentication occur, such as when a user attempts to access the switch local

browser interface and does not provide a valid user name and password. The default

is Enable.

• Link Up/Down. When enabled, SNMP traps are sent when the administrative or

operational state of a physical or logical link changes. The default is Enable.

•Spanning Tree. When enabled, SNMP traps are sent when various spanning tree

events occur. The default is Enable.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual74

View the Supported MIBs

You can view a list of all MIBs that are supported on the switch.

To view the supported MIBs:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Supported MIBs.

The following table describes the SNMP Supported MIBs Status fields.

Table 16. SNMP supported MIBs

Field Description

Name The RFC number if applicable and the name of the MIB.

Description The RFC title or MIB description.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual75

Configure SNMP V3 Users

Any user can connect to the switch using the SNMPv3 protocol, but for authentication and

encryption, the switch supports only one user (admin). Therefore, you can create or modify

only one profile.

To configure authentication and encryption settings for the SNMPv3 admin profile by

using the web interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMPv3 > User Configuration.

The User Configuration page displays.

The SNMPv3 Access Mode field is a read-only field that shows the access privileges for

the user account. Access for the admin account is always Read/Write. Access for all

other accounts is Read Only.

6. To enable authentication, select an Authentication Protocol radio button.

You can select the MD5 radio button or the SHA radio button. With either of these

options, the user login password is used as SNMPv3 authentication password. For

information about how to configure the login password, see Change the Password for the

Local Browser Interface on page 200.

7. To enable encryption:

a. Select the Encryption Protocol DES radio button to encrypt SNMPv3 packets using

the DES encryption protocol.

b. In the Encryption Key field, enter an encryption code of eight or more alphanumeric

characters.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual76

Configure LLDP

The IEEE 802.1AB-defined standard, Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), allows stations

on an 802 LAN to advertise major capabilities and physical descriptions. A network manager

can view this information to identify system topology and detect bad configurations on the

LAN.

The following sections describe how you can configure LLDP:

•Configure LLDP Global Settings on page 76

•Configure LLDP Port Settings on page 78

•View the LLDP-MED Network Policy on page 79

•Configure LLDP-MED Port Settings on page 81

•View the Local Information Advertised Through LLDP on page 82

•View LLDP Neighbors Information on page 84

LLDP is a one-way protocol without any request/response sequences. Information is

advertised by stations implementing the transmit function, and is received and processed by

stations implementing the receive function. The transmit and receive functions can be

enabled or disabled separately per port. By default, both transmit and receive are disabled on

all ports. The application is responsible for starting each transmit and receive state machine

appropriately, based on the configured status and operational state of the port.

The Link Layer Discovery Protocol-Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) is an

enhancement to LLDP with the following features:

•Autodiscovery of LAN policies (such as VLAN, Layer 2 priority, and DiffServ settings),

enabling plug and play networking.

•Device location discovery for creation of location databases.

•Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet endpoints.

•Inventory management, enabling network administrators to track their network devices

and determine their characteristics (manufacturer, software and hardware versions,

serial/asset number).

Configure LLDP Global Settings

You can specify the global LLDP and LLDP-MED settings that are applied to the switch.

To configure global LLDP settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual77

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > LLDP > Basic > LLDP Configuration.

6. To configure nondefault values for the following LLDP properties, specify the following

options:

• TLV Advertised Interval. The number of seconds between transmissions of LLDP

advertisements.

• Hold Multiplier . The transmit interval multiplier value, where transmit hold multiplier ×

transmit interval = the time to live (TTL) value that the device advertises to neighbors.

• Re-initializing Delay. The number of seconds to wait before attempting to re-initialize

LLDP on a port after the LLDP operating mode on the port changes.

• Transmit Delay. The minimum number of seconds to wait between transmissions of

remote data change notifications to one or more SNMP trap receivers configured on

the switch.

7. To configure a nondefault value for LLDP-MED, enter a value in the Fast Start Duration

field.

This value sets the number of LLDP packets sent when the LLDP-MED fast start

mechanism is initialized, which occurs when a new endpoint device links with the

LLDP-MED network connectivity device.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual78

Configure LLDP Port Settings

You can specify per-interface LLDP settings.

To configure the LLDP interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > LLDP > Advanced > LLDP Port Settings.

6. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual79

7. Use the following menus to configure the LLDP settings for the selected ports:

• Admin Status. Select the status for transmitting and receiving LLDP packets:

- Tx Only. Enable only transmitting LLDP PDUs on the selected ports.

- Rx Only. Enable only receiving LLDP PDUs on the selected ports.

- Tx and Rx. Enable both transmitting and receiving LLDP PDUs on the selected

ports.

- Disabled. Do not transmit or receive LLDP PDUs on the selected ports.

The default is Tx and Rx.

• Management IP Address. Choose whether to advertise the management IP address

from the interface. The possible field values are as follows:

-Stop Advertise. Do not advertise the management IP address from the interface.

- Auto Advertise. Advertise the current IP address of the device as the

management IP address.

The default is Auto Advertise.

•Notification. When notifications are enabled, LLDP interacts with the trap manager to

notify subscribers of remote data change statistics. The default is Disable.

•Optional TL Vs. Enable or disable the transmission of optional type-length value (TLV)

information from the interface. The default is Enable. The TLV information includes

the system name, system description, system capabilities, and port description.

For information about how to configure the system name, see View and Configure

the Switch Management Settings on page 32. For information about how to

configure the port description, see Configure the Port Settings and Maximum Frame

Size on page 103.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View the LLDP-MED Network Policy

You can display information about the LLPD-MED network policy TLV transmitted in the

LLDP frames on the selected local interface.

To view LLDP-MED network policy information for an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual80

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > LLDP > Advanced > LLDP-MED Network Policy.

The LLDP-MED Network Policy page displays.

6. From the Interface menu, select the interface for which you want to view the information.

Note: The menu includes only the interfaces on which LLDP is enabled. If no

interfaces are enabled for LLDP, the Interface menu does not display.

The page refreshes and displays the data transmitted in the network policy TLVs for the

interface.

The following table describes the LLDP-MED network policy information that displays on the

page.

Table 17. LLDP-MED network policy information

Field Description

Network Policy Number The policy number.

Application The media application type associated with the policy, which can be one of the

following:

• Unknown

• Voice

• Guest Voice

• Guest Voice Signaling

• Softphone Voice

• Video Conferencing

• Streaming Video

• Video Signaling

A port can receive multiple application types. The application information is

displayed only if a network policy TLV was transmitted from the port.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the policy.

VLAN Type Indicates whether the VLAN associated with the policy is tagged or untagged.

User Priority The priority associated with the policy.

DSCP The DSCP associated with a particular policy type.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual81

Configure LLDP-MED Port Settings

You can enable LLDP-MED mode on an interface and configure its properties.

To configure LLDP-MED settings for a port:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > LLDP > Advanced > LLDP-MED Port Settings.

The LLDP-MED Port Settings page displays.

6. From the Port menu, select the port to configure.

7. Use the following menus to enable or disable the following LLDP-MED settings for the

selected port:

• LLDP-MED Status. The administrative status of LLDP-MED on the interface. When

LLDP-MED is enabled, the transmit and receive function of LLDP is effectively

enabled on the interface.

• Notification. When Notification is enabled, the port sends a topology change

notification if a device is connected or removed.

• MED Capabilities. When MED Capabilities is enabled, the port transmits the

capabilities type length values (TLVs) in the LLDP PDU frames.

•Network Policy. When Network Policy is enabled, the port transmits the network

policy TLV in LLDP frames.

• Extended MDI-PSE. When Extended MDI-PSE is enabled, the port transmits the

extended PSE TLV in LLDP frames.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual82

View the Local Information Advertised Through LLDP

You can view the data that each port advertises through LLDP.

To view local LLDP information:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > LLDP > Advanced > Local Information.

The page includes only the interfaces on which LLDP is enabled.

The following table describes the LLDP device information and port summary information.

Field Description

Device Information

Chassis ID Subtype The type of information used to identify the switch in the Chassis ID field.

Chassis ID The hardware platform identifier for the switch.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual83

6. To view additional details about a port, click the name of the port in the Interface column of

the Port Information table.

The following table describes the detailed local information that displays for the selected

port.

System Name The user-configured system name for the switch.

System Description The switch description, which includes information about the product model

and platform.

System Capabilities The primary functions that the switch supports.

Port Information

Interface The interface associated with the rest of the data in the row.

Port ID Subtype The type of information used to identify the interface in the Port ID field.

Port ID The port number.

Port Description The user-defined description of the port. For information about how to

configure the port description, see Configure the Port Settings and

Maximum Frame Size on page 103.

Advertisement The TLV advertisement status of the port.

Field Description

Managed Address

Address SubType The type of address the management interface uses, such as an IPv4

address.

Address The address used to manage the device.

Interface SubType The port subtype.

Interface Number The number that identifies the port.

MAC/PHY Details

Auto Negotiation Supported Indicates whether the interface supports port speed autonegotiation. The

option is True (enabled) or False (disabled).

Auto Negotiation Enabled The port speed autonegotiation support status. The option is True (enabled)

or False (disabled).

Auto Negotiation Advertised

Capabilities The port speed autonegotiation capabilities such as 1000BASE-T half-duplex

mode or 100BASE-TX full-duplex mode.

Operational MAU Type The Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) type. The MAU performs physical layer

functions, including digital data conversion from the Ethernet interface

collision detection and bit injection into the network.

Field Description

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual84

View LLDP Neighbors Information

You can view the data that a specified interface received from other LLDP-enabled systems.

To view LLDP information received from a neighbor device:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > LLDP > Advanced > Neighbors Information.

The Neighbors Information page displays.

If no information was received from a neighbor device, or if the link partner is not

LLDP-enabled, no information displays.

MED Details

Capabilities Supported The MED capabilities enabled on the port.

Current Capabilities The TLVs advertised by the port.

Device Class Network Connectivity indicates that the device is a network connectivity

device.

Network Policies

Application Type The media application type associated with the policy.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the policy.

VLAN Type Specifies whether the VLAN associated with the policy is tagged or untagged.

User Priority The priority associated with the policy.

DSCP The DSCP associated with a particular policy type.

Field Description

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual85

The following table describes the information that displays for all LLDP neighbors that

were discovered.

Field Description

MSAP Entry The Media Service Access Point (MSAP) entry number for the remote

device.

Local Port The interface on the local system that received LLDP information from a

remote system.

Chassis ID Subtype The type of data displayed in the Chassis ID field on the remote system.

Chassis ID The remote 802 LAN device’s chassis.

Port ID Subtype The type of data displayed in the remote system’s Port ID field.

Port ID The physical address of the port on the remote system from which the data

was sent.

System Name The system name associated with the remote device. If the field is blank, the

name might not be configured on the remote system.

6. To view additional information about the remote device, click the link in the MSAP Entry

column.

A pop-up window displays information for the selected port.

The following table describes the information transmitted by the neighbor.

Field Description

Port Details

Local Port The interface on the local system that received LLDP information from a

remote system.

MSAP Entry The Media Service Access Point (MSAP) entry number for the remote device.

Basic Details

Chassis ID Subtype The type of data displayed in the Chassis ID field on the remote system.

Chassis ID The remote 802 LAN device’s chassis.

Port ID Subtype The type of data displayed in the remote system’s Port ID field.

Port ID The physical address of the port on the remote system from which the data

was sent.

Port Description The user-defined description of the port.

System Name The system name associated with the remote device.

System Description The description of the selected port associated with the remote system.

System Capabilities The system capabilities of the remote system.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual86

Managed Addresses

Address SubType The type of the management address.

Address The advertised management address of the remote system.

Interface SubType The port subtype.

Interface Number The port on the remote device that sent the information.

MAC/PHY Details

Auto-Negotiation Supported Specifies whether the remote device supports port-speed autonegotiation.

The option is True (enabled) or False (disabled).

Auto-Negotiation Enabled The port speed autonegotiation support status. The option is True (enabled)

or False (disabled).

Auto Negotiation Advertised

Capabilities The port speed autonegotiation capabilities.

Operational MAU Type The Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) type. The MAU performs physical layer

functions, including digital data conversion from the Ethernet interface

collision detection and bit injection into the network.

MED Details

Capabilities Supported The supported capabilities that were received in MED TLV from the device.

Current Capabilities The advertised capabilities that were received in MED TLV from the device.

Device Class The LLDP-MED endpoint device class. The possible device classes are as

follows:

• Endpoint Class 1 Indicates a generic endpoint class, offering basic LLDP

services.

• Endpoint Class 2 Indicates a media endpoint class, offering media

streaming capabilities as well as all Class 1 features.

• Endpoint Class 3 Indicates a communications device class, offering all

Class 1 and Class 2 features plus location, 911, Layer 2 switch support,

and device information management capabilities.

PoE Device Type The port PoE type. For example, Powered.

PoE Power Source The port’s power source.

PoE Power Priority The port’s power priority.

PoE Power Value The port’s power value.

Hardware Revision The hardware version advertised by the remote device.

Firmware Revision The firmware version advertised by the remote device.

Software Revision The software version advertised by the remote device.

Serial Number The serial number advertised by the remote device.

Field Description

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual87

Configure DHCP Snooping

DHCP snooping is a useful feature that provides security by filtering untrusted DHCP

messages and by building and maintaining a DHCP snooping binding table. An untrusted

message is a message that is received from outside the network or firewall and that can

cause traffic attacks within your network. The DHCP snooping binding table contains the

MAC address, IP address, lease time, binding type, VLAN number, and interface information

that corresponds to the local untrusted interfaces of a switch. An untrusted interface is an

interface that is configured to receive messages from outside the network or firewall. A

trusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive only messages from within the

network.

Model Name The model name advertised by the remote device.

Asset ID The asset ID advertised by the remote device.

Location Information

Civic The physical location, such as the street address, that the remote device

advertised in the location TLV, for example, 123 45th St. E. The field value

length range is 6–160 characters.

Coordinates The location map coordinates that the remote device advertised in the

location TLV, including latitude, longitude, and altitude.

ECS ELIN The Emergency Call Service (ECS) Emergency Location Identification

Number (ELIN) that the remote device advertised in the location TLV. The

field range is 10–25.

Unknown The unknown location information for the remote device.

Network Policies

Application Type The media application type associated with the policy advertised by the

remote device.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the policy.

VLAN Type Specifies whether the VLAN associated with the policy is tagged or untagged.

User Priority The priority associated with the policy.

DSCP The DSCP associated with a particular policy type.

LLDP Unknown TLVs

Type The unknown TLV type field.

Value The unknown TLV value field.

Field Description

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual88

DHCP snooping acts like a firewall between untrusted hosts and DHCP servers. It also

provides way to differentiate between untrusted interfaces connected to the end user and

trusted interfaces connected to the DHCP server or another switch.

Configure the Global DHCP Snooping Settings

You can view and configure the global settings for DHCP snooping.

To configure the global DHCP snooping settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Global Configuration.

6. Select the DHCP Snooping Mode Enable radio button.

The default is Disable.

7. To enable the verification of the sender’s MAC address for DHCP snooping, leave the MAC

Address Validation Enable radio button selected.

The default is Enable.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual89

When MAC address validation is enabled, the device checks packets that are received

on an untrusted interface to verify that the MAC address and the DHCP client hardware

address match. If the addresses do not match, the device drops the packet.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Enable DHCP for All Interfaces in a VLAN

To enable DHCP snooping for all interfaces that are members of a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Global Configuration.

The DHCP Snooping Global Configuration page displays.

6. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN on which DHCP snooping is enabled.

7. From the DHCP Snooping Mode menu, select Enable.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure DHCP Snooping Interface Settings

You can view and configure each port as a trusted or untrusted port. Any DHCP responses

received on a trusted port are forwarded. If a port is configured as untrusted, any DHCP (or

BootP) responses received on that port are discarded.

To configure DHCP snooping interface settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual90

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Interface Configuration.

6. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

7. From the Trust Mode menu, select the desired trust mode:

•Disabled. The interface is considered to be untrusted and could potentially be used to

launch a network attack. DHCP server messages are checked against the bindings

database. On untrusted ports, DHCP snooping enforces the following security rules:

-DHCP packets from a DHCP server (DHCPOFFER, DHCPACK, DHCPNAK,

DHCPRELEASEQUERY) are dropped.

-DHCPRELEASE and DHCPDECLINE messages are dropped if the MAC address

is in the snooping database but the binding’s interface is other than the interface

where the message was received.

-DHCP packets are dropped when the source MAC address does not match the

client hardware address if MAC address validation is globally enabled.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual91

• Enabled. The interface is considered to be trusted and forwards DHCP server

messages without validation.

8. From the Invalid Packets menu, select the packet logging mode.

When enabled, the DHCP snooping feature generates a log message when an invalid

packet is received and dropped by the interface.

9. In the Rate Limit (pps) field, specify the rate limit value for DHCP snooping purposes.

If the incoming rate of DHCP packets per second exceeds the configured burst interval

per second, the port shuts down. If the rate limit value is None, he burst interval is also

nonapplicable, and rate limiting is disabled.

10. In the Burst Interval (secs) field, specify the burst interval value for rate limiting purposes

on the interface.

If the rate limit is N/A, then the burst interval is also nonapplicable, and the field displays

N/A.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Static DHCP Bindings

You can view , add, and remove static bindings in the DHCP snooping bindings database and

to view or clear the dynamic bindings in the bindings table.

To configure static DHCP bindings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Binding Configuration.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual92

6. From the Interface menu, select the interface on which the DHCP client is authorized.

7. In the MAC Address field, specify the MAC address for the binding to be added.

This is the key to the binding database.

8. From the VLAN ID menu, select the ID of the VLAN that the client is authorized to use.

9. In the IP Address field, specify the IP address of the client.

10. Click the Add button.

The DHCP snooping binding entry is added to the database.

The Dynamic Binding Configuration table shows information about the DHCP bindings that

were learned on each interface on which DHCP snooping is enabled. The following table

describes the dynamic bindings information.

Table 18. DHCP Dynamic Configuration information

Field Description

Interface The interface on which the DHCP client message was received.

MAC Address The MAC address associated with the DHCP client that sent the message. This is the

key to the binding database.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the client interface.

IP Address The IP address assigned to the client by the DHCP server.

Lease T ime The remaining IP address lease time for the client.

Configure DHCP Snooping Persistent Settings

You can configure the persistent location of the DHCP snooping bindings database. The

bindings database can be stored locally on the device or on a remote system somewhere

else in the network. The device must be able to reach the IP address of the remote system to

send bindings to a remote database.

To configure DHCP snooping persistent settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual93

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Persistent Configuration.

The Persistent Configuration page displays.

6. Specify where the DHCP snooping bindings database is located.

• Local. The binding table is stored locally on the switch.

•Remote. The binding table is stored on a remote TFTP server.

If the database is stored on a remote server, specify the following information:

- Remote IP Address. Specify the IP address of the TFTP server.

- Remote File Name. Specify the file name of the DHCP snooping bindings

database in which the bindings are stored.

7. In the Write Delay field, specify the time that the switch must wait after writing binding

information to persistent storage.

The delay allows the switch to collect as many entries as possible (new and removed)

before writing them to the persistent file. You can specify from 15 to 86400 seconds. By

default, the delay is 300 seconds.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View or Clear DHCP Snooping Statistics

You can view and clear per-interface statistics about the DHCP messages filtered by the

DHCP snooping feature on untrusted interfaces.

To view or clear the DHCP snooping statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual94

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System> Services > DHCP Snooping > Statistics.

The DHCP Snooping Statistics page displays.

6. Click the Clear button to clear all interfaces statistics.

The following table describes the DHCP snooping statistics.

Table 19. DHCP Snooping Statistics information

Field Description

Interface The interface associated with the rest of the data in the row.

MAC Verify Failures The number of DHCP messages that were dropped because the source MAC address

and client hardware address did not match. MAC address verification is performed only if

it is globally enabled.

Client Ifc Mismatch The number of packets that were dropped by DHCP snooping because the interface and

VLAN on which the packet was received do not match the client’s interface and VLAN

information stored in the binding database.

DHCP Server Msgs

Received The number of DHCP server messages (such as DHCPOFFER, DHCPACK, DHCPNAK,

and DHCPRELEASEQUERY messages) that were dropped on an untrusted port.

Set Up PoE Timer Schedules

The switch lets you define multiple timer schedules (each with a unique name) that you can

use for PoE power delivery to attached PDs.

After you create a timer schedule, you can associate it with one or more PoE ports (see

Configure the PoE Port Settings on page 64). You can use a separate timer schedule for

each PoE port.

After you associate a timer schedule with a PoE port, the start date and time force the PoE

port to stop delivering power and the stop date and time enable the PoE port to start

delivering power.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual95

You can create absolute timer schedules, which apply to specific dates and times, and you

can create recurring timer schedules. For each timer schedule, you can add multiple entries

that apply to the selected timer schedule only.

Create a PoE Timer Schedule

The maximum number of timer schedules that you can add is 100.

To create a PoE timer schedule:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Timer Schedule > Basic > Global Configuration.

The Timer Schedule Name page displays.

6. In the Timer Schedule Name field, specify the name for a timer schedule.

7. Click the Add button.

The timer schedule is added to the table on the Timer Schedule Name page and is

assigned an ID.

Specify the Settings for an Absolute PoE Timer Schedule

An absolute timer schedule applies to specific dates and times. The schedule is executed

once only.

To specify the settings for a PoE timer schedule that uses specific dates and times:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual96

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System> Timer Schedule > Advanced > Timer Schedule Configuration.

The Timer Schedule Configuration page displays.

6. In the Timer Schedule Selection section, make your selections from the following menus:

a. Timer Schedule Name. Select the name of the timer schedule that you want to

configure.

You can select only names of schedules that you created (see Create a PoE Timer

Schedule on page 95).

b. Timer Schedule Type. Select Absolute.

The fields in the Timer Schedule Configuration section might adjust to let you configure

a timer schedule for specific dates and times.

c. Timer Schedule Entry. To add a new entry, select new.

Selecting an existing entry lets you make changes to that entry.

7. In the Timer Schedule Configuration section, specify the times and dates:

a. In the Time Start field, enter the time of day in the HH:MM format to specify when the

timer schedule must start.

b. In the Time End field, enter the time of day in the HH:MM format to specify when the

timer schedule must stop.

c. Next to the Date Start field, click the calendar icon and use the menus in the pop-up

window to enter the date in the DD-Mon-YYY format to specify when the timer

schedule must start.

d. Next to the Date End field, click the calendar icon and use the menus in the pop-up

window to enter the date in the DD-Mon-YYY format to specify when the timer

schedule must stop.

8. Click the Add button.

The entry for the timer schedule is added.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual97

Specify the Settings for a Recurring PoE Timer Schedule

A recurring schedule allows you to set up a single schedule that starts at a particular date

and that recurs either with a specific end date or indefinitely.

For a single recurring PoE timer schedule, you can add a daily, weekly, and monthly schedule

configuration. That is, these schedule configurations are not mutually exclusive but

complement each other.

To specify the settings for a PoE timer schedule that uses a recurring pattern:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System> Timer Schedule > Advanced > Timer Schedule Configuration.

The Timer Schedule Configuration page displays.

6. In the Timer Schedule Selection section, make your selections from the following menus:

a. Timer Schedule Name. Select the name of the timer schedule that you want to

configure.

You can select only names of schedules that you created (see Create a PoE Timer

Schedule on page 95).

b. Timer Schedule Type. Select Periodic.

The fields in the Timer Schedule Configuration section might adjust to let you configure

a timer schedule with a recurrence pattern.

c. Timer Schedule Entry. To add a new entry, select new.

Selecting an existing entry lets you make changes to that entry.

7. In the Timer Schedule Configuration section, specify the recurrence pattern:

a. In the Time Start field, enter the time of day in the HH:MM format to specify when the

timer schedule must start.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual98

b. In the Time End field, enter the time of day in the HH:MM format to specify when the

timer schedule must stop.

c. Next to the Date Start field, click the calendar icon and use the menus in the pop-up

window to enter the date in the DD-Mon-YYY format to specify when the timer

schedule must start.

d. Either select the No End Date radio button or select the End Date radio button, and

next to the End Date field, click the calendar icon and use the menus in the pop-up

window to enter the date in the DD-Mon-YYY format to specify when the timer

schedule must stop.

e. From the Recurrence Pattern menu, select the pattern:

• Daily. The timer schedule works with daily recurrence. The fields adjust.

Either select the Every Weekday radio button to let the schedule operate from

Monday through Friday or select the Every Day(s) radio button and enter a

number from 0 to 255 in the field.

In the latter case, the schedule is triggered every specified number of days. If the

number of days is not specified, or if you enter 0, then the schedule is triggered

only once.

• Weekly. The timer schedule works with weekly recurrence. The fields adjust.

In the Every Week(s) field, enter a number from 0 to 255 to specify that the

schedule must be triggered every specified number of weeks. If the number of

weeks is not specified, or if you enter 0, then the schedule is triggered only once.

Select a single Week Day check box, multiple check boxes, or all check boxes to

specify the day or days of the week that the schedule must operate.

• Monthly. The timer schedule works with monthly recurrence. The fields adjust.

In the Day field, enter a number from 1 to 31 to specify the day of the month when

the schedule must be triggered.

In the Every Month(s) field, enter a number from 0 to 99 to specify that the

schedule must be triggered every specified number of months. If the number of

months is not specified, or if you enter 0, then the schedule is triggered only once.

8. Click the Add button.

The entry for the timer schedule is added.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual99

Change the Settings for a Recurring PoE Timer Schedule

Entry

You can change the settings for an existing recurring PoE timer schedule entry. (You cannot

do this for an existing absolute PoE timer schedule.)

To change the settings for an existing recurring PoE timer schedule entry:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Timer Schedule > Advanced > Timer Schedule Configuration.

The Timer Schedule Configuration page displays.

6. From the Timer Schedule Name menu, select the schedule name.

7. From the Timer Schedule Type menu, select the schedule type.

8. From the Timer Schedule Entry menu, select the schedule entry.

9. Make the changes to the schedule entry.

For more information, see Specify the Settings for a Recurring PoE Timer Schedule on

page 97.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual100

Delete a PoE Timer Schedule Entry

You can delete a PoE timer schedule entry that you no longer need.

To delete a PoE timer schedule entry:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Timer Schedule > Advanced > Timer Schedule Configuration.

The Timer Schedule Configuration page displays.

6. From the Timer Schedule Name menu, select the schedule name.

7. From the Timer Schedule Type menu, select the schedule type.

8. From the Timer Schedule Entry menu, select the schedule entry.

9. Click the Delete button.

The entry is deleted.

Delete a PoE Timer Schedule

You can delete a PoE timer schedule that you no longer need. All entries that are part of the

PoE timer schedule are also deleted.

To delete a PoE timer schedule:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure System Information User Manual101

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Timer Schedule > Basic > Global Configuration.

The Timer Schedule Name page displays.

6. Select the check box for the schedule that you want to delete.

7. Click the Delete button.

The schedule is deleted.

102

3Configure Switching

This chapter contains the following sections:

•Configure the Port Settings and Maximum Frame Size

•Configure Link Aggregation Groups

•Configure VLANs

•Configure Auto-VoIP

•Configure Spanning Tree Protocol

•Configure Multicast

•View, Search, and Manage the MAC Address Table

•Configure Layer 2 Loop Protection

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual103

Configure the Port Settings and Maximum

Frame Size

You can view, configure, and monitor the physical port information for the ports (that is, the

physical interfaces) on the switch.

To configure the port settings and maximum frame size:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Ports > Port Configuration.

6. In the Frame Size field, specify the maximum Ethernet frame size that each interface can

support.

The frame size includes the Ethernet header, CRC, and payload. The range is 1522 to

10000. The default maximum frame size is 1522.

7. Select the check box to the left of the Port column to specify the interface for which data is

to be displayed or configured.

To select an interface, you can also enter the interface number in the Go To Interface

field and click the Go button.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual104

8. In the Description field, enter the description string to be attached to a port.

The string can be up to 64 characters in length.

9. From the Admin Mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

This selection specifies the administrative mode for port control. You must select Enable

in order for the port to participate in the network. The default is Enable.

10. From the Autonegotiation menu, select Enable or Disable.

This selection specifies the autonegotiation mode for the port. The default is Enable.

Note: After you change the autonegotiation mode, the switch might be

inaccessible for a number of seconds while the new settings take

effect.

11. In the Speed field, specify the speed value for the selected port.

Possible field values are as follows:

• Auto. All supported speeds.

•1

0. 10 Mbits/second

• 100. 100 Mbits/second

The delimiter characters for setting different speed values are a comma (,), a period (.)

and a space ( ). For you to set the autonegotiation speed, the autonegotiation mode must

be set to Enable. The default is Auto.

Note: After you change the speed value, the switch might be inaccessible for

a number of seconds while the new settings take effect.

12. From the Duplex Mode menu, select the duplex mode for the selected port.

The options are as follows:

• Half. Indicates that the interface supports transmission between the devices in only

one direction at a time.

• Full. Indicates that the interface supports transmission between the devices in both

directions simultaneously.

•Auto. Indicates that speed is set by the auto-negotiation process.

The default is Auto.

Note: After you change the duplex mode, the switch might be inaccessible for

a number of seconds while the new settings take effect.

13. From the Link Trap menu, select whether or not to send a trap when the link status

changes.

By default, the switch sends a link trap.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual105

14. From the Flow Control menu, select the configuration for IEEE 802.3 flow control.

• Disable. If the port buffers become full, the switch does not send pause frames, and

data loss could occur. This is the default setting.

• Symmetric. If the port buffers become full, the switch sends pause frames to stop

traffic.

Flow control helps to prevent data loss when the port cannot keep up with the number

of frames being switched. When you enable flow control, the switch can send a pause

frame to stop traffic on the port if the amount of memory used by the packets on the

port exceeds a preconfigured threshold and responds to pause requests from partner

devices. The paused port does not forward packets for the time that is specified in the

pause frame. When the pause frame time elapses, or the utilization returns to a

specified low threshold, the switch enables the port to again transmit frames. The

switch also honors incoming pause frames by temporarily halting transmission.

• Asymmetric. If the port buffers become full, the switch does not send pause frames,

and data loss could occur . However , the switch does honor incoming pause frames by

temporarily halting transmission.

Note: For LAG interfaces, flow control mode is displayed as a blank field

because flow control is not applicable.

15. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Table 20. Port Configuration information

Field Description

Port Type For normal ports this field is blank. Otherwise, the options are as follows:

• Mirrored. The port is a mirrored port on which all the traffic is copied to

the probe port.

• Probe. Use the port to monitor a mirrored port.

• Trunk Member. The port is a member of a link aggregation trunk. Look

at the LAG pages for more information.

Physical Status The port speed and duplex mode.

Link Status Indicates whether the link is up or down.

Frame Size (1522 to 10000) The maximum Ethernet frame size that each interface can support. The

frame size depends on your selection from the Frame Size menu above the

table and applies to each interface.

MAC Address The physical address of the specified interface.

PortList Bit Offset The bit offset value that corresponds to the port when the MIB object type

PortList is used to manage in SNMP.

ifIndex The ifIndex of the interface table entry associated with the port.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual106

Configure Link Aggregation Groups

Link aggregation groups (LAGs), which are also known as port channels, allow you to

combine multiple full-duplex Ethernet links into a single logical link. Network devices treat the

aggregation as if it were a single link, which increases fault tolerance and provides load

sharing. You assign the LAG VLAN membership after you create a LAG. By default, the LAG

becomes a member of the default management VLAN (that is, VLAN 1).

A LAG interface can be either static or dynamic, but not both. All members of a LAG must

participate in the same protocols. A static port channel interface does not require a partner

system to be able to aggregate its member ports.

The switch supports static LAGs. When a port is added to a LAG as a static member, the port

neither transmits nor receives LACPDUs.

Model GS308T and model GS310TP support eight LAGs each.

Configure LAG Settings

You can group one or more full-duplex Ethernet links to be aggregated together to form a link

aggregation group, which is also known as a port channel. The switch treats the LAG as if it

were a single link.

To configure LAG settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> LAG > Basic > LAG Configuration.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual107

6. In the LAG Name field, enter a name for the LAG.

You can enter any string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters.

7. In the Description field, enter the description string to be attached to a LAG.

The description can be up to 64 characters in length.

8. From the Admin Mode menu, select Enable or Disable.

When the LAG is disabled, no traffic flows and LACPDUs are dropped, but the links that

form the LAG are not released. The default is Enable.

9. From the Hash Mode menu, select the load-balancing mode for a port channel (LAG):

• 1 Src/Dest MAC, incoming port. This mode uses the source MAC address,

destination MAC address, and incoming port that are associated with the packet.

• 2 Src/Dest IP and TCP/UDP Port Fields. This mode uses the source and destination

IP addresses and source and destination TCP or UDP port values that are associated

with the packet.

Note: The switch balances traffic on a port channel (LAG) by selecting one

of the links in the channel over which packets must be transmitted. The

switch selects the link by creating a binary pattern from selected fields

in a packet and associating that pattern with a particular link.

10. From the STP Mode menu, select the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) administrative mode

associated with the LAG:

•Disable. Spanning tree is disabled for this LAG.

• Enable. Spanning tree is enabled for this LAG. Enable is the default.

11. From the Link Trap menu, select Enable or Disable to specify whether to send a trap when

the link status changes.

The default is Enable, which causes the trap to be sent.

12. From the LAG Type menu, select Static or LACP:

•Static. Disables Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on the selected LAG. The

LAG is configured manually. The default is Static.

• LACP. Enables LACP on the selected LAG. The LAG is configured automatically.

13. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual108

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 21. LAG Configuration information

Field Description

LAG ID Identification of the LAG.

Active Ports Indicates the ports that are actively participating in the port channel.

LAG State Indicates whether the link is up or down.

Configure LAG Membership

You can select two or more full-duplex Ethernet links to be aggregated together to form a link

aggregation group (LAG), which is also known as a port channel. The switch can treat the

port channel as a single link.

To configure LAG membership:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> LAG > Basic > LAG Membership.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual109

The previous figure shows the LAG Membership page for model GS310TP.

6. From the LAG ID menu, select the LAG ID.

7. In the LAG Name field, enter the name to be assigned to the LAG.

You can enter any string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters. You can also use the

default name.

8. In the Ports table, click each port that you want to include as a member of the selected

LAG.

A selected port is displayed by a check mark.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Set the LACP System Priority

You can set the LACP system priority that applies to all LAGs on the switch.

To configure LACP:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> LAG > Advanced > LACP Configuration.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual110

6. In the LACP System Priority field, specify the switch’s link aggregation priority relative to

the devices at the other ends of the links on which link aggregation is enabled.

A higher value indicates a lower priority. You can change the setting globally by

specifying a priority from 1 to 65535. The default value is 32768.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Set the LACP Port Priority Settings

The LACP port configuration page is used to configure the LACP priority value for the selected

port and the administrative LACP time-out value.

To configure LACP port priority settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> LAG > Advanced > LACP Port Configuration.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual111

6. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the interface, or

type the interface number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

7. In the LACP Priority field, specify the LACP priority value for the selected interfaces.

This value specifies the interface’s link aggregation priority relative to the devices at the

other ends of the links on which link aggregation is enabled. A higher value indicates a

lower priority. The range is 1 to 65535. The default value is 128.

8. In the Timeout field, configure the administrative LACP time-out value:

• Long. Specifies a long time-out value.

•Short. Specifies a short time-out value.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure VLANs

Adding virtual LAN (VLAN) support to a Layer 2 switch offers some of the benefits of both

bridging and routing. Like a bridge, a VLAN switch forwards traffic based on the Layer 2

header, which is fast, and like a router, it partitions the network into logical segments, which

provides better administration, security, and management of multicast traffic.

By default, all ports on the switch are in the same broadcast domain. VLANs electronically

separate ports on the same switch into separate broadcast domains so that broadcast

packets are not sent to all the ports on a single switch. When you use a VLAN, users can be

grouped by logical function instead of physical location.

Each VLAN in a network is assigned an associated VLAN ID, which appears in the IEEE

802.1Q tag in the Layer 2 header of packets transmitted on a VLAN. An end station can omit

the tag, or the VLAN portion of the tag, in which case the first switch port to receive the

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual112

packet can either reject it or insert a tag using its default VLAN ID. A port can handle traf fic for

more than one VLAN, but it can support only one default VLAN ID.

You can define VLAN groups stored in the VLAN membership table. The switch supports up

to 64 VLANs.

The following VLANs are preconfigured on the switch and you cannot delete them:

• VLAN 1. The default VLAN of which all ports are members.

•VLAN 2. The default Auto-VoIP VLAN. By default, this VLAN does not include any

members but you can manually add members.

• VLAN 4089. The Auto-V ideo VLAN. By default, this VLAN does not include any members

but you can manually add members.

Configure VLAN Settings

You can configure the various VLAN settings.

Add a VLAN

To add a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Basic > VLAN Configuration.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual113

6. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN identifier for the new VLAN.

The range of the VLAN ID can be from 3 to 4093, excluding 4089. (The default VLANs

are 1, 2, and 4089).

7. In the VLAN Name field, specify a name for the VLAN.

The VLAN name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long, including blanks. You

cannot change the names of the default VLANs (that is, the VLANs with ID 1, 2, and

4089).

8. The VLAN Type field displays the type of the VLAN that you are configuring.

You cannot change the type of the default VLANs (that is, the VLANs with ID 1, 2, and

4089).

9. Click the Add button.

The VLAN is added to the switch.

Delete a VLAN

To delete a VLAN from the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual114

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Basic > VLAN Configuration.

The VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. In the VLAN ID field, specify the VLAN identifier.

The range of the VLAN ID can be from 3 to 4093, excluding 4089.

Note: You cannot delete VLANs 1, 2, and 4089, all of which are predefined.

7. Click the Delete button.

The VLAN is removed.

Reset the VLAN Configuration on the Switch to the Default Settings

If you reset the VLAN configuration on the switch to the default settings, all VLANs that you

added are deleted. (The predefined VLANS are not deleted).

The VLAN default values are as follows:

•All ports are assigned to the default VLAN of 1.

•All ports are configured with a PVID of 1.

•All ports are configured to an Acceptable Frame Types value of Admit All Frames.

•All ports are configured with ingress filtering disabled.

•All ports are configured to transmit only untagged frames.

To reset the VLAN configuration on the switch to the default settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Basic > VLAN Configuration.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual115

You can also select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Configuration.

The VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. Select the Reset Configuration check box.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved. Except for the predefined default VLANs, all VLANs are deleted.

Configure VLAN Membership

To configure VLAN membership:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Membership.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual116

The previous figure shows the LAG Membership page for model GS310TP.

6. In the VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN ID.

You can select a VLAN that is predefined or that you added (see Add a VLAN on

page 112).

7. In the Group Operation menu, select one of the following options, which applies to all ports

in the VLAN:

• Untag All. For all ports and LAGs that are members of the VLAN, tags are removed

from all egress packets.

• T ag All. For all ports and LAGs that are members of the VLAN, all egress packets are

tagged.

• Remove All. All ports and LAGs are removed from the VLAN.

8. In the Ports table, click each port once, twice, or three times to configure one of the following

modes or reset the port to the default mode:

•T (Tagged). Selects the port as a tagged port in the VLAN. All frames transmitted on

the port are tagged for this VLAN.

•U (Untagged). Selects the port as an untagged port in the VLAN. All frames

transmitted on the port are untagged for this VLAN.

•Blank. The port is excluded from the VLAN.

By default, the selection is blank and none of the ports are a member of the VLAN.

(VLAN 1 is an exception. By default, all ports are untagged members of VLAN 1.)

9. In the LAG table, click each LAG once, twice, or three times to configure one of the following

modes or reset the LAG to the default mode:

•T (Tagged). Selects the LAG as a tagged LAG in the VLAN. All frames transmitted on

the LAG are tagged for this VLAN.

•U (Untagged). Selects the LAG as an untagged LAG in the VLAN. All frames

transmitted on the LAG are untagged for this VLAN.

•Blank. The LAG is excluded from the VLAN.

By default, the selection is blank and none of the LAGs are a member of the VLAN.

(VLAN 1 is an exception. By default, all LAGs are untagged members of VLAN 1.)

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual117

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 22. Advanced VLAN membership

Field Definition

VLAN Name The name for the VLAN that you selected. It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long,

including blanks. The names for the following VLANs are predefined:

• VLAN 1. Default.

• VLAN

2. Auto-VoIP.

• VLAN

4089. Auto-Video.

VLAN Type The type of the VLAN you selected:

• Default (VLAN ID = 1). Always present.

• Static. A VLAN that you configured.

• Dynamic. A dynamically created VLAN.

View the VLAN Status

You can view the status of all currently configured VLANs.

To view the VLAN status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Status.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual118

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 23. VLAN status

Field Definition

VLAN ID The VLAN identifier (VID) of the VLAN. The range of the VLAN ID is from 1 to 4093.

VLAN Name The name of the VLAN.

VLAN Type The VLAN type:

• Default (VLAN ID = 1). Always present.

• Auto-VoIP (VLAN ID = 2). Always present.

• Auto-VIdeo (VLAN ID = 4089). Always present.

• Static. A VLAN that you configured.

• Dynamic. A dynamically created VLAN.

Member Ports The ports, LAGs, or both that are included in the VLAN.

Configure Port PVID Settings

You can assign a port VLAN ID (PVID) to an interface. The following requirements apply to a

PVID:

•By default, the PVID for each port is 1.

•If you do not specify another value, the default VLAN PVID is used.

•To change the port’s default PVID, you must first create a VLAN that includes the port as

a member (see Configure VLAN Membership on page 115).

To configure PVID settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > Port PVID Configuration.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual119

The previous figure shows the PVID Configuration page for model GS310TP.

6. To display information for all physical ports and LAGs, click the All link.

7. Select interfaces by selecting the Interface check boxes next to the interfaces.

You can select multiple interfaces. To select all the interfaces, select the Interface check

box in the heading row.

8. In the PVID field, specify the VLAN ID to assign to untagged or priority-tagged frames

received on the port.

The default is 1.

9. In the VLAN Member field, specify the VLAN ID or list of VLANs of a member port.

VLAN IDs range from 1 to 4093. The default is 1. Use a hyphen (-) to specify a range or a

comma (,) to separate VLAN IDs in a list. Spaces and zeros are not permitted.

10. In the VLAN Tag field, specify the VLAN ID or list of VLANs of a tagged port.

VLAN IDs range from 1 to 4093. Use a hyphen (-) to specify a range or a comma (,) to

separate VLAN IDs in a list. Spaces and zeros are not permitted. You can specify port

tagging for the VLAN only if the port that you want to add as a tagged port is also member

of the VLAN. To reset the VLAN tag configuration to the defaults, use the None keyword.

11. From the Acceptable Frame menu, specify one if the following types of frames that can be

received on the port:

• Admit All. Untagged frames or priority-tagged frames that are received on the port

are accepted and assigned the value of the port VLAN ID for the port. This is the

default selection.

• VLAN Only. Untagged frames or priority-tagged frames that are received on the port

are discarded.

•Admit Untagged Only. Untagged frames that are received on the port are accepted.

With the Admit All and VLAN Only selections, VLAN-tagged frames are forwarded in

accordance to the 802.1Q VLAN specification.

12. From the Ingress Filtering menu, select one of the following options:

• Enable. The frame is discarded if the port is not a member of the VLAN with which

this frame is associated. In a tagged frame, the VLAN is identified by the VLAN ID in

the tag. In an untagged frame, the VLAN is the port VLAN ID specified for the port that

received this frame.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual120

• Disable. All frames are forwarded in accordance with the 802.1Q VLAN bridge

specification. The default is Disable.

13. In the Port Priority field, specify the default 802.1p priority assigned to untagged packets

arriving at the port.

You can enter a number from 0 to 7.

14. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.

Table 24. Nonconfigurable fields on the PVID Configuration page

Field Description

Current Ingress Filtering Indicates whether ingress filtering is enabled for the interface.

Untagged VLANs The number of untagged VLANs for the interface.

Tagged VLANs The number of tagged VLANs for the interface.

Forbidden VLANs The number of forbidden VLANs for the interface.

Dynamic VLANs The number of dynamically added VLANs for the interface.

Configure a MAC-Based VLAN

The MAC-Based VLAN feature allows incoming untagged packets to be assigned to a VLAN

and thus classify traffic based on the source MAC address of the packet.

You define a MAC-to-VLAN mapping by configuring an entry in the MAC-to-VLAN table. An

entry is specified through a source MAC address and a VLAN ID. The MAC-to-VLAN

configurations are shared across all ports of the switch (that is, a system-wide table exists

with MAC address–to–VLAN ID mappings).

When untagged or priority-tagged packets arrive at the switch and entries exist in the

MAC-to-VLAN table, the source MAC address of the packet is looked up. If an entry is found,

the corresponding VLAN ID is assigned to the packet. If the packet is already priority-tagged,

it maintains this value. Otherwise, the priority is set to zero. The assigned VLAN ID is verified

against the VLAN table. If the VLAN is valid, ingress processing on the packet continues.

Otherwise, the packet is dropped. This implies that you can configure a MAC address

mapping to a VLAN that you did not yet create on the switch.

Add a MAC-Based VLAN

To add a MAC-based VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual121

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > MAC Based VLAN.

6. In the MAC Address field, enter a MAC address to be bound to a VLAN ID.

This field is configurable only when a MAC-based VLAN is created.

7. In the VLAN ID field, specify a VLAN ID in the range from 1 to 4093.

8. Click the Add button.

The MAC address is added to the VLAN mapping.

Delete a MAC Address From VLAN Mapping

To delete a MAC address from VLAN mapping:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual122

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > MAC Based VLAN.

The MAC Based VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. In the MAC Address field, enter a MAC address.

This field is configurable only when a MAC-based VLAN exists.

7. In the VLAN ID field, specify a VLAN ID in the range from 1 to 4093.

8. Click the Delete button.

The MAC address is removed from the VLAN mapping.

Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Groups

You can use a protocol-based VLAN to define filtering criteria for untagged packets. By

default, if you do not configure any port-based (IEEE 802.1Q) or protocol-based VLANs,

untagged packets are assigned to VLAN 1. You can override this behavior by defining either

port-based VLANs or protocol-based VLANs, or both. Tagged packets are always handled

according to the IEEE 802.1Q standard and are not included in protocol-based VLANs.

If you assign a port to a protocol-based VLAN for a specific protocol, untagged frames that

arrive on that port for that protocol are assigned the protocol-based VLAN ID. Untagged

frames that arrive on the port for other protocols are assigned the port VLAN ID, either the

default PVID (1) or a PVID you specifically assigned to the port (see Configure Port PVID

Settings on page 118).

You define a protocol-based VLAN by creating a group. Each group forms a one-to-one

relationship with a VLAN ID, can include one to three protocol definitions, and can include

multiple ports. When you create a group, you specify a name and a group ID is assigned

automatically.

To configure a protocol-based VLAN group:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual123

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration.

6. In the Group ID field, enter a number to identify the group.

The number must be in the range from 1 to 128.

7. In the Group Name field, enter a name for the new group.

You can enter up to 16 characters.

8. In the Protocol field, enter one or more protocols that must be associated with the group.

You can enter keywords such as arp, ip, and ipx. Separate keywords with a comma. You

can also enter hexadecimal or decimal values in the range from 0x0600 (1536) to

0xFFFF (65535).

9. In the VLAN ID field, enter the VLAN ID.

The ID can be any number in the range from 1 to 4093. All the ports in the group assign

this VLAN ID to untagged packets received for the protocols that you included in this

group.

10. Click the Add button.

The protocol-based VLAN group is added to the switch.

The Ports field displays all the member ports that belong to the group.

Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Group Membership

To configure protocol-based VLAN group membership:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual124

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > Protocol Based VLAN Group Membership.

The previous figure shows the Protocol Based VLAN Group Membership page for model

GS310TP.

6. From the Group ID menu, select the protocol-based VLAN group ID.

The Group Name field shows the name that is associated with the group.

7. In the Ports table and LAG table, click each port and LAG that you want to include in the

protocol-based VLAN group.

A protocol-based VLAN group can include both port and LAGs. A selected port or LAG is

displayed by a check mark.

8. Click the Apply button

Your settings are saved.

9. To display the current numbers in the selected protocol-based VLAN group, click the

Current Members button.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual125

Configure a Voice VLAN

You can configure the settings for a voice VLAN configuration.

To configure a voice VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > Voice VLAN Configuration.

6. Select the Admin Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

This selection specifies the administrative mode for the voice VLAN for the switch. The

default is Disable.

7. Select the interface by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual126

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the Interface Mode menu, select the voice VLAN mode for selected interfaces:

• Disable. This is the default value.

•None. Allow the IP phone to use its own configuration to send untagged voice traffic.

•VLAN ID. Configure the phone to send tagged voice traffic. You must enter the VLAN

ID in the Value field (see the next step).

• Dot1p. Configure voice VLAN 802.1p priority tagging for voice traffic. You must enter

the dot1p value in the Value field (see the next step).

• Untagged. Configure the phone to send untagged voice traffic.

9. In the Value field, enter the VLAN ID or dot1p value.

This field is enabled only if you select VLAN ID or Dot1p from the Interface Mode menu.

10. In the CoS Override Mode field, select Disable or Enable.

The default is Disable.

11. In the Authentication Mode field, select Enable or Disable.

The default is Enable. When the authentication mode is enabled, voice traffic is allowed

on an unauthorized voice VLAN port. When the authentication mode is disabled, devices

are authorized through dot1x.

Note: Authentication through dot1x is possible only if dot1x is enabled.

12. In the DSCP Value field, configure the Voice VLAN DSCP value for the port.

The range is from 0 to 64. The default value is 0.

13. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The Operational State field displays the operational status of the voice VLAN on an

interface.

Configure Auto-VoIP

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) enables telephone calls over a data network. Because

voice traffic is typically more time-sensitive than data traf fic, the Auto-VoIP feature provides a

classification for voice packets so that they can be prioritized above data packets, allowing

the switch to provide better Quality of Service (QoS). With the Auto-VoIP feature, voice

prioritization is provided based on the SIP call-control protocol or OUI bits.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual127

Configure Protocol-Based Port Settings for VoIP

To prioritize time-sensitive voice traffic over data traffic, protocol-based Auto-VoIP checks for

packets carrying the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) VoIP protocol.

VoIP frames that are received on ports that for which the Auto-VoIP feature is enabled are

marked with the specified CoS traffic class value.

To configure protocol-based port settings for VoIP:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > Protocol-based > Port Settings.

6. From the Prioritization Type menu, select Traffic Class or Remark.

This selection specifies the type of prioritization.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual128

7. From the Class Value menu, specify the CoS class value to be reassigned for packets that

the voice VLAN receives.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure Auto-VoIP OUI-Based Properties

With Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI)–based Auto-VoIP, voice prioritization is

provided based on OUI bits.

To configure Auto-VoIP OUI-based properties:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > Properties.

The OUI-Based Properties page displays.

6. In the Auto-VoIP VLAN ID field, enter the VoIP VLAN ID of the switch.

The default Auto-VoIP VLAN ID is 2. You can use that VLAN ID or create another VLAN

ID for Auto-VoIP.

7. From the OUI-based priority menu, select the OUI-based priority of the switch, from 0 to 7.

The default value is 7.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual129

Configure the OUI-Based Port Settings

You can configure the OUI port settings.

To configure OUI-based port settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > Port Settings.

6. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

7. From the Auto VoIP Mode menu, select Disable or Enable.

Auto-VoIP is disabled by default.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual130

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The Operational Status field displays the current operational status of an interface.

Manage the OUI Table

Device hardware manufacturers can include an OUI in a network adapter to help identify a

hardware device. The OUI is a unique 24-bit number assigned by the IEEE registration

authority. The switch comes preconfigured with the following OUIs that identify the IP phone

manufacturer:

•00:01:E3: SIEMENS

•00:03:6B: CISCO1

•00:12:43: CISCO2

•00:60:B9: NITSUKO

•00:D0:1E: PINTEL

•00:E0:75: VERILINK

•00:E0:BB: 3COM

•00:04:0D: AVAYA1

•00:1B:4F: AVAYA2

You can select an existing OUI or add a new OUI and description to identify the IP phones on

the network.

Configure the OUI Table

To configure the OUI Table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual131

5. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > OUI Table.

The OUI Table page displays.

6. In the Telephony OUI(s) field, specify the VoIP OUI prefix to be added in the format

AA:BB:CC.

You can configure up to 32 OUIs.

7. In the Description field, enter the description for the OUI.

The maximum length of description is 32 characters.

8. Click the Add button.

The telephony OUI entry is added.

Delete One or More OUI Prefixes From the OUI Table

To delete one or more OUI prefixes from the OUI table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > OUI Table.

The OUI Table page displays.

6. Select the check box next to each OUI prefix to be removed.

7. Click the Delete button.

The telephony OUI entries are removed.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual132

Display the Auto-VoIP Status

You can display the Auto-VoIP status.

To view the Auto-VoIP status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > Auto-VoIP Status.

The Auto-VoIP Status page displays.

6. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Update button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable Auto-VoIP status information.

Table 25. Auto-VoIP status

Field Description

Auto-VoIP VLAN ID The Auto-VoIP VLAN ID.

Maximum Number of Voice

Channels Supported The maximum number of voice channels supported.

Number of Voice Channels

Detected The number of VoIP channels prioritized successfully.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual133

Configure Spanning Tree Protocol

The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) provides a tree topology for any arrangement of network

devices. STP also provides one path between end stations on a network, eliminating loops.

STP (also referred to as “classic” STP) provides a single path between end stations, avoiding

and eliminating loops. For information about configuring the global STP settings for the

switch, see Configure the STP Settings and View the STP Status on page 133.

The switch support the following spanning tree versions:

• CST. Common STP. For information on configuring CST, see Configure and View the

CST Settings on page 135 and Configure and View the CST Port Settings on page 137.

• MSTP. Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP, also referred to as MST) supports

multiple instances of spanning tree to efficiently channel VLAN traffic over different

interfaces. For information on configuring MSTP, see Manage MST Settings on page 142

and Configure and View the Port Settings for an MST Instance on page 144.

• RSTP. Rapid STP. Each instance of the spanning tree behaves in the manner specified in

IEEE 802.1w, Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP), with slight modifications in the working but

not the end effect (chief among the effects is the rapid transitioning of the port to the

forwarding state). For information on viewing the RSTP state, see View Rapid STP

Information on page 141.

The difference between the RSTP and the traditional STP (IEEE 802.1D) is the ability to

configure and recognize full-duplex connectivity and ports that are connected to end

stations, resulting in rapid transitioning of the port to the forwarding state and the

suppression of Topology Change Notification. These features are represented by the

parameters pointtopoint and edgeport. MSTP is compatible with both RSTP and STP. It

behaves in a way that is appropriate for STP and RSTP bridges. An MSTP bridge can be

configured to behave entirely as an RSTP bridge or an STP bridge.

Note: For two bridges to be in the same region, the force version must be

802.1s and their configuration names, digest keys, and revision levels

must match. For additional information about regions and their effect

on network topology, refer to the IEEE 802.1Q standard.

Configure the STP Settings and View the STP Status

You can configure the STP settings and view the STP status on the switch.

To configure the STP settings and view the STP status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual134

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Basic > STP Configuration.

6. Configure the following global settings for the switch:

a. Spanning Tree State. Enable or disable the spanning tree operation on the switch.

By default, spanning tree operation is disabled.

b. STP Operation Mode. Specify the STP version for the switch.

The options are STP, RSTP, and MSTP. The default is RSTP.

c. Configuration

Name. Specify a name to identify the STP, RSTP, or MSTP

configuration.

The name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters.

d. Configuration

Revision Level. Specify an identifier to identify the STP, RSTP, or

MSTP configuration.

The values can be from 0 to 65535. The default value is 0.

e. Forward BPDU while STP Disabled. Enable or disable the bridge protocol data unit

(BPDU) flood.

This setting specifies whether spanning tree BPDUs are forwarded while spanning

tree is disabled on the switch.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual135

8. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Update button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields displayed on the page.

Table 26. STP Configuration status

Field Description

Global Settings

Configuration Digest Key The identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used.

STP Status

Bridge Identifier The bridge identifier for the CST. It is made up using the bridge priority and

the base MAC address of the bridge.

Time Since Topology Change The time in day-hour-minute-second format since the topology of the CST

last changed.

Topology Change Count The number of times that the topology changed for the CST.

Topology Change The value of the topology change setting for the switch that indicates if a

topology change is in progress on any port assigned to the CST. The option

is True or False.

Designated Root The bridge identifier of the root bridge. It consists of the bridge priority and

the base MAC address of the bridge.

Root Path Cost The path cost to the designated root for the CST.

Root Port The port to access the designated root for the CST.

Max Age (secs) The maximum age timer controls the maximum length of time in seconds

that passes before a bridge port saves its configuration BPDU information.

Forward Delay (secs) The derived value of the Root Port Bridge Forward Delay setting.

Hold T ime (secs) The minimum time in seconds between the transmission of configuration

BPDUs.

CST Regional Root The priority and base MAC address of the CST regional root.

CST Path Cost The path cost to the CST tree regional root.

Configure and View the CST Settings

You can configure a common spanning tree (CST) and internal spanning tree on the switch.

To configure and view the CST settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual136

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Configuration.

6. Specify the CST options:

• Bridge Priority. When switches or bridges are running STP, each is assigned a

priority. After exchanging BPDUs, the switch with the lowest priority value becomes

the root bridge. Specify the bridge priority value for the Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CST). The range is from 0 to 61440. The bridge priority is a multiple

of 4096. If you specify a priority that is not a multiple of 4096, the priority is

automatically set to the next lowest priority that is a multiple of 4096. For example, if

you set the priority to any value between 0 and 4095, the switch automatically sets the

value to 0. The default value is 32768.

• Bridge Max Age (secs). The bridge maximum age time for the Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CST), which indicates the time in seconds a bridge must wait before

implementing a topological change. The range is from 6 to 40, and the value must be

less than or equal to (2 * Bridge Forward Delay) – 1 and greater than or equal to 2 *

(Bridge Hello Time +1). The default value is 20.

• Bridge Hello Time (secs). The bridge hello time for the Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CST), which indicates the time in seconds a root bridge must wait

between configuration messages. The value is fixed at 2 seconds. The value must be

less than or equal to (Bridge Max Age / 2) – 1. The default hello time value is 2.

• Bridge Forward Delay (secs). The bridge forward delay time, which indicates the

time in seconds a bridge must remains in a listening and learning state before

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual137

forwarding packets. The value must be greater or equal to (Bridge Max Age / 2) + 1.

The time range is from 4 seconds to 30 seconds. The default value is 15 seconds.

• Spanning Tree Maximum Hops. The maximum number of bridge hops the

information for a particular CST instance can travel before being discarded. The

range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 hops.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

8. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Update button.

The following table describes the MSTP Status information that is displayed.

Table 27. STP advanced CST configuration, MSTP status

Field Description

MST ID The MST instances (including the CST) and the corresponding VLAN IDs associated with each

of them.

VID ID The VLAN IDs and the corresponding FID associated with each of them.

FID ID The FIDs and the corresponding VLAN IDs associated with each of them.

Configure and View the CST Port Settings

You can configure a common spanning tree (CST) and internal spanning tree on a specific

port on the switch.

A port can become diagnostically disabled (D-Disable) when DOT1S experiences a severe

error condition. The most common cause is when the DOT1S software experiences BPDU

flooding. The flooding criteria are such that DOT1S receives more than 15 BPDUs in a

3-second interval. The other causes for DOT1S D-Disable are very rare.

To configure and view the CST port settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual138

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Port Configuration.

6. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

7. From the STP Status menu, select the option to enable or disable the spanning tree

administrative mode associated with the port or LAG.

The option is Enable or Disable. The default value is Enable.

8. From the Fast Link menu, select whether the specified port is an edge port within the CST.

The option is Enable or Disable. The default value is Disable.

9. From the BPDU Forwarding menu, configure BPDU forwarding.

The option is Enable or Disable. The default value is Disable. When BPDU forwarding is

enabled, the switch forwards the BPDU traffic arriving on the port when STP is disabled

on the port.

10. From the Auto Edge menu, specify if the port is allowed to become an edge port if it does

not detect BPDUs for some time.

The option is Enable or Disable. The default value is Enable.

11. In the Path Cost field, set the path cost to a new value for the specified port in the common

and internal spanning tree.

Specify a value in the range from 0 to 200000000. The default is 0. When the path cost is

set to 0, the value is updated with the external path cost from an incoming STP packet.

12. In the Priority field, specify the priority for a particular port within the CST.

The port priority is set in multiples of 16. For example if you attempt to set the priority to

any value between 0 and 15, it is set to 0. If you try to set it to any value between 16 and

(2*16 – 1), it is set to 16, and so on. The range is 0 to 240. The default value is 128.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual139

13. In the External Port Path Cost field, set the external path cost to a new value for the

specified port in the spanning tree.

The value range is 0 to 200000000. The default is 0.

14. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

15. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Update button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 28. CST port configuration

Field Description

Port State The forwarding state of the port. The default is Disabled.

Port ID The port identifier for the specified port within the CST. It is made up from the port

priority and the interface number of the port.

Hello T imer The value of the setting for the CST. The default is 2 seconds.

View the CST Port Status

You can display the common spanning tree (CST) and internal spanning tree for a specific

port on the switch.

To view the CST port status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Port Status.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual140

6. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Update button.

The following table describes the CST Status information displayed on the page.

Table 29. CST port status

Field Description

Interface The physical port or LAG that is associated with the CST.

Port Role Each MST bridge port that is enabled is assigned a port role for each

spanning tree. The port role can be Root, Designated, Alternate, Backup,

Master, or Disabled.

Designated Root The root bridge for the CST. It is made up using the bridge priority and the

base MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Cost The path cost offered to the LAN by the designated port.

Designated Bridge The identifier of the bridge with the designated port. It is made up using the

bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Port The port identifier on the designated bridge that offers the lowest cost to the

LAN. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.

Topology Change Acknowledge Identifies whether the topology change acknowledgement flag is set for the

next BPDU to be transmitted for the port. It is either True or False.

Edge port Indicates whether the port is enabled as an edge port. It is either Enabled or

Disabled.

Point-to-point MAC The derived value of the point-to-point status.

CST Regional Root The bridge identifier of the CST regional root. It is made up using the bridge

priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

CST Path Cost The path cost to the CST regional root.

Port Forwarding State The forwarding state of the port.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual141

View Rapid STP Information

You can view information about the Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP) port status.

To view information about RSTP:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > RSTP.

6. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Update button.

The following table describes the Rapid STP Status information displayed on the page.

Table 30. Rapid STP status information

Field Description

Interface The physical or port channel interfaces associated with VLANs associated with the CST.

Role Each MST bridge port that is enabled is assigned a port role for each spanning tree. The port

role can be Root, Designated, Alternate, Backup Master, or Disabled.

Mode Specifies the spanning tree operation mode. Different modes are STP, RSTP, and MSTP.

Fast Link Indicates whether the port is enabled as an edge port.

Status The forwarding state of the port.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual142

Manage MST Settings

You can configure a multiple spanning tree (MST) on the switch.

Configure an MST Instance

To configure an MST instance:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Configuration.

6. Configure the MST values:

• MST ID. Specify the ID of the MST to create. The range is from 1 to 4094. This is

visible only when the select option of the MST ID select box is selected.

•Priority. The bridge priority value for the MST. When switches or bridges are running

STP, each is assigned a priority. After exchanging BPDUs, the switch with the lowest

priority value becomes the root bridge. The bridge priority is a multiple of 4096. If you

specify a priority that is not a multiple of 4096, the priority is automatically set to the

next lowest priority that is a multiple of 4096. For example, if you set the priority to any

value between 0 and 4095, the switch automatically sets the value to 0. The default

value is 32768. The range is from 0 to 61440.

• VLAN Id. The menu includes all VLANs that are configured on the switch. You can

select VLANs that must be associated with the MST instance or clear VLANs that are

already associated with the MST instance.

7. Click the Add button.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual143

The MST is added.

For each configured instance, the information described in the following table displays on the

page.

Table 31. MST configuration

Field Description

Bridge Identifier The bridge identifier for the selected MST instance. It is made up using the bridge

priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Last TCN The time in the format “day:hour:minute:second” since the topology of the selected

MST instance last changed.

Topology Change Count The number of times that the topology changed for the selected MST instance.

Topology Change The value of the topology change settings for the switch, indicating if a topology

change is in progress on any port assigned to the selected MST instance. It is either

True or False.

Designated Root The bridge identifier of the root bridge. It is made up from the bridge priority and the

base MAC address of the bridge

Root Path Cost The path cost to the designated root for this MST instance.

Root Port The port to access the designated root for this MST instance.

Modify an MST Instance

To modify an MST instance:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Configuration.

The MST Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the instance.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual144

You can select multiple check boxes to apply the same setting to all selected ports.

7. Update the values.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Delete an MST Instance

To delete an MST instance:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Configuration.

The MST Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box for the instance.

7. Click the Delete button.

The MST instance is removed.

Configure and View the Port Settings for an MST Instance

You can configure and display the Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) settings on a specific port

on the switch.

A port can become diagnostically disabled (D-Disable) when DOT1S experiences a severe

error condition. The most common cause is when the DOT1S software experiences BPDU

flooding. The flooding criteria is such that DOT1S receives more than 15 BPDUs in a

3-second interval. The other causes for DOT1S D-Disable are extremely rare.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual145

To configure and view the port settings for an MST instance:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Port Configuration.

The MST Port Configuration page displays.

If no MST instances are configured on the switch, the page displays a “No MSTs

Available” message.

6. From the Select MST menu, select the MST instance.

You can select only instances that you added to the switch (see Manage MST Settings

on page 142).

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. Configure the MST values for the selected interfaces:

• Port Priority. The priority for a particular port within the selected MST instance. The

port priority is set in multiples of 16. If you specify a value that is not a multiple of 16,

the priority is set to the priority is automatically set to the next lowest priority that is a

multiple of 16. For example, if you set a value between 0 and 15, the priority is set to

0. If you specify a number between 16 and 31, the priority is set to 16. Specify a value

in the range from 0 to 240.

• Port Path Cost. Set the path cost to a new value for the specified port in the selected

MST instance. Specify a value in the range from 0 to 200000000.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual146

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

10. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Update button.

The following table describes the read-only MST port configuration information displayed on

the Spanning Tree CST Configuration page.

Table 32. MST port status information

Field Description

Auto Calculated Port Path

Cost Indicates whether the path cost is automatically calculated (Enabled) or not

(Disabled). Path cost is calculated based on the link speed of the port if the

configured value for Port Path Cost is zero.

Port ID The port identifier for the specified port within the selected MST instance. It is

made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.

Port Up Time Since Counters

Last Cleared The time since the counters were last cleared, displayed in days, hours,

minutes, and seconds.

Port Mode The Spanning T ree Protocol administrative mode that is associated with the port

or port channel. The option is Enable or Disable.

Port Forwarding State The current STP state of a port. If enabled, the port state determines what

forwarding action is taken on traffic. The options are as follows:

• Disabled. STP is currently disabled on the port. The port forwards traffic

while learning MAC addresses.

• Discarding. The port is currently blocked. The port cannot forward traffic

nor can it learn MAC addresses.

• Manual Forwarding. STP is currently disabled on the port. The port

forwards traffic while learning MAC addresses.

• Learning. The port is currently in the learning mode. The port cannot

forward traffic. However, it can learn new MAC addresses.

• Forwarding. The port is currently in the forwarding mode. The port can

forward traffic and learn new MAC addresses.

Port Role Each MST bridge port that is enabled is assigned a port role for each spanning

tree. The port role can be Root, Designated, Alternate, Backup, Master, or

Disabled.

Designated Root The root bridge for the selected MST instance. It is made up using the bridge

priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Cost The cost of the port participating in the STP topology. Ports with a lower cost are

less likely to be blocked if STP detects loops.

Designated Bridge The bridge identifier of the bridge with the designated port. It is made up using

the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Port The port identifier on the designated bridge that offers the lowest cost to the

LAN. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual147

View the STP Statistics

You can view information about the number and type of bridge protocol data units (BPDUs)

transmitted and received on each port.

To view the spanning tree statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > STP Statistics.

6. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Update button.

The following table describes the information available about the STP Statistics page.

Table 33. STP Statistics

Field Description

Interface The physical port or LAG on the switch.

STP BPDUs Received The number of STP BPDUs received at the selected port.

STP BPDUs Transmitted The number of STP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.

RSTP BPDUs Received The number of RSTP BPDUs received at the selected port.

RSTP BPDUs Transmitted The number of RSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual148

Configure Multicast

Multicast IP traffic is traf fic that is destined to a host group. Host groups for IPv4 multicast are

identified by class D addresses, which range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.

View and Search the MFDB Table

The Multicast Forwarding Database (MFDB) holds the port membership information for all

active multicast address entries. The key for an entry consists of a VLAN ID and MAC

address pair. Entries can contain data for more than one protocol.

To view and search the MFDB Table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Multicast > MFDB > MFDB Table.

MSTP BPDUs Received The number of MSTP BPDUs received at the selected port.

MSTP BPDUs Transmitted The number of MSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.

Table 33. STP Statistics (continued)

Field Description

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual149

6. In the Search by MAC Address field, enter a MAC address.

Enter six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example

00:01:23:43:45:67.

7. Click the Go button.

If the address exists, the entry is displayed. An exact match is required.

8. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Update button.

9. To clear all multicast forwarding address entries, click the Clear button.

Table 34. MFDB table information

Field Description

MAC Address The multicast MAC address for which you requested data.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID to which the multicast MAC address is related.

Type The type of the entry. Static entries are those that are configured by the end user.

Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning process or protocol.

Component The component that is responsible for this entry in the Multicast Forwarding Database.

The options are IGMP snooping, GMRP, Static Filtering, and MLD snooping.

Description The text description of this multicast table entry. The options are Management

Configured, Network Configured, and Network Assisted.

Forwarding Interfaces The resultant forwarding list is derived from combining all the forwarding interfaces and

removing the interfaces that are listed as the static filtering interfaces.

View the MFDB Statistics

To view the MFDB statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual150

5. Select Switching > Multicast > MFDB > MFDB Statistics.

The MFDP Statistics page displays.

6. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Update button.

The following table describes the MFDB Statistics fields.

Table 35. MFDB Statistics information

Field Description

Max MFDB Table Entries The maximum number of entries that the Multicast Forwarding Database

table can hold (256 entries).

Most MFDB Entries Since Last

Reset The largest number of entries that were present in the Multicast Forwarding

Database table since last reset. This value is also known as the MFDB

high-water mark.

Current Entries The current number of entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database table.

Configure the Auto-Video Multicast Settings

You can configure the auto-video multicast settings.

To configure auto-video multicast settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > Auto-Video.

The Auto-Video Configuration page displays.

6. Select one of the following radio buttons:

•Select the Disable radio button to globally disable Auto-V ideo administrative mode for

the switch.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual151

•Select the Enable radio button to globally enable Auto-Video administrative mode for

the switch.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The Auto-Video VLAN field displays the Auto-Video VLAN ID that is configured on the

switch. By default, this VLAN ID is 4089.

About IGMP Snooping

Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping is a feature that allows a switch to

forward multicast traffic intelligently. Multicast IP traffic is traffic that is destined to a host

group. Host groups are identified by class D IP addresses, which range from 224.0.0.0 to

239.255.255.255. Based on the IGMP query and report messages, the switch forwards traffic

only to the ports that request the multicast traffic. This prevents the switch from broadcasting

the traffic to all ports and possibly affecting network performance.

A traditional Ethernet network can be separated into different network segments to prevent

placing too many devices onto the same shared media. Bridges and switches connect these

segments. When a packet with a broadcast or multicast destination address is received, the

switch forwards a copy to each of the remaining network segments in accordance with the

IEEE MAC Bridge standard. Eventually, the packet is made accessible to all nodes

connected to the network.

This approach works well for broadcast packets that are intended to be detected or

processed by all connected nodes. For multicast packets, this approach could lead to a less

efficient use of the network bandwidth, particularly when the packets are intended for a small

number of nodes only. Packets are flooded into network segments where no node is

receptive to the packet. Although nodes rarely incur any processing overhead to filter packets

addressed to unrequested group addresses, the nodes cannot transmit new packets onto the

shared media while the multicast packets are being flooded. Such as waste of bandwidth is

even worse when the LAN segment is not shared, for example in full-duplex links.

Allowing switches to snoop IGMP packets can solve this problem. While the IGMP packets

are being forwarded throughout the network, the switch uses the information in the packets to

determine which segments must receive packets that are directed to the group address.

Configure IGMP Snooping

You can configure the settings for IGMP snooping, which is used to build forwarding lists for

multicast traffic.

To configure IGMP snooping:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual152

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Configuration.

6. Select the IGMP Snooping Status Enable or Disable radio button.

This specifies the administrative mode for IGMP snooping for the switch. The default is

Disable.

7. Select the Validate IGMP IP header Enable or Disable radio button.

When IGMP IP header validation is enabled, any IGMP IP header must include the

Router Alert, ToS, and TTL information. Otherwise, the IGMP packet is discarded. The

default value is Enable.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

9. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Update button.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual153

The following table displays information about the global IGMP snooping status and statistics

on the page.

Table 36. IGMP Snooping Configuration information

Field Description

Multicast Control Frame Count The number of multicast control frames that are processed by the CPU.

Interfaces Enabled for IGMP

Snooping The interfaces that are enabled for IGMP snooping.

VLAN IDs Enabled For IGMP

Snooping The IDs of the VLANs that are enabled for IGMP snooping.

VLAN IDs Enabled For IGMP

Snooping Querier The IDs of the VLANs that are enabled for IGMP snooping querier.

Configure IGMP Snooping for Interfaces

To configure IGMP snooping for interfaces:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Interface Configuration.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual154

6. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

7. From the Admin Mode menu, select Disable or Enable.

This specifies the interface mode for the selected interface for IGMP snooping for the

switch. The default is Disable.

8. In the Host Timeout field, specify the time that the switch must wait for a report for a

particular group on a particular interface before it deletes that interface from the group.

Enter a value between 1 and 3600 seconds. The default is 260 seconds.

9. In the Max Response Time field, specify the time that the switch must wait after sending a

query on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular group on that

interface.

Enter a value greater or equal to 1 and less than the group membership interval in

seconds. The default is 10 seconds. The configured value must be less than the group

membership interval.

10. In the MRouter Timeout field, specify the time that the switch must wait to receive a query

on an interface before removing it from the list of interfaces with multicast routers attached.

Enter a value between 0 and 3600 seconds. The default is 0 seconds. A value of zero

indicates an infinite time-out, that is, no expiration.

11. From the Fast Leave Mode menu, select whether fast leave mode is enabled.

The option are Enable and Disable. The default is Disable.

12. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual155

View, Search, or Clear the IGMP Snooping Table

You can view all of the entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database that were created for

IGMP snooping.

To view, search, or clear the IGMP snooping table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping Table.

The IGMP Snooping Table page displays.

6. In the Search By MAC Address field, specify the MAC address whose MFDB table entry

you want to view.

Enter six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example

00:01:23:43:45:67.

7. Click the Go button.

If the address exists, the entry is displayed. An exact match is required.

8. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Update button.

9. To clear all multicast forwarding address entries that were created for IGMP snooping, click

the Clear button.

The following table describes the information in the IGMP snooping table.

Table 37. IGMP Snooping Table information

Field Description

MAC Address The multicast MAC address for which the switch holds forwarding and/or filtering

information. The format is six two-digit hexadecimal numbers that are separated

by colons, for example, 01:00:5e:45:67:89.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID for which the switch holds forwarding and filtering information.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual156

Configure IGMP Snooping for VLANs

To configure IGMP snooping settings for VLANs:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration.

6. Select the check boxes for one or more VLANs.

If you select the check box for a single VLAN, the VLAN ID displays in the VLAN ID field.

Type The type of the entry. Static entries are those that are configured by the end

user. Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning process or

protocol.

Description The text description of this multicast table entry. The options are Management

Configured, Network Configured, and Network Assisted.

Interface The interfaces that are designated for forwarding (Fwd) and filtering (Flt) for the

associated address.

Table 37. IGMP Snooping Table information (continued)

Field Description

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual157

7. Configure the IGMP snooping values for the selected VLAN or VLANs:

• Admin Mode. Enable or disable IGMP snooping for the specified VLAN ID. The

default is Disable.

•Fast Leave Mode. Enable or disable the IGMP snooping fast leave mode for the

specified VLAN ID. The default is Disable.

•Host Timeout. Set the value for group membership interval of IGMP snooping for the

specified VLAN ID. The range is from the value for the Maximum Response T ime plus

1 to 3600 seconds. The default is 260 seconds.

• Maximum Response Time. Set the value for the maximum response time of IGMP

snooping for the specified VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to the Host Timeout value

minus 1. This value must be greater than group membership interval value. The

default is 10 seconds.

• MRouter Timeout. Set the value for multicast router expiry time of IGMP snooping for

the specified VLAN ID. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds. The default is

0 seconds.

• Report Suppression Mode. Enable or disable IGMP snooping report suppression

mode for the specified VLAN ID. IGMP snooping report suppression allows the

suppression of the IGMP reports sent by the multicast hosts by building a Layer 3

membership table. The results is that only the most essential reports are sent to the

IGMP routers so that the routers can continue to receive the multicast traffic.The

default is Disable.

• Querier Mode. Enable or disable the IGMP querier mode. The default is Disable.

•Query Interval. Set the IGMP query interval for the specified VLAN ID. The range is

from 1 to 1800 seconds. The default is 60 seconds.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Modify IGMP Snooping Settings for a VLAN

To modify IGMP snooping settings for a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual158

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration.

The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the VLAN ID.

7. Update the values.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Disable IGMP Snooping on a VLAN

To disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration.

The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the VLAN ID.

7. From the Admin Mode menu, select Disable.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual159

Configure a Multicast Router Interface

You can configure an interface as the designated interface to which a multicast router is

connected. All IGMP packets snooped by the switch are forwarded to the multicast router

reachable from the interface. Configuring a multicast router interface is usually not required

because the switch automatically detects the multicast router and forwards IGMP packets

accordingly. This configuration is required only if you want to make sure that the multicast

router always receives IGMP packets from the switch in a complex network.

To configure a multicast router interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Multicast Router Configuration.

6. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual160

7. From the Multicast Router menu, select Enable or Disable.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure a Multicast Router VLAN

You can configure an interface to forward only snooped IGMP packets from a specific VLAN

to the multicast router connected to the interface. This configuration is usually not required

because the switch automatically detects a multicast router and forwards the IGMP packets

accordingly. This configuration is required only if you want to make sure that the multicast

router always receives IGMP packets from the switch in a complex network.

To configure a multicast router VLAN:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Multicast Router VLAN

Configuration.

6. From the Interface menu, select the interface.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual161

7. In the VLAN ID field, enter the VLAN ID.

8. From the Multicast Router menu, select Enable or Disable.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

IGMP Snooping Querier Overview

IGMP snooping requires that one central switch or router periodically queries all end-devices

on the network to announce their multicast memberships. This central device is the IGMP

querier. The IGMP query responses, known as IGMP reports, keep the switch updated with

the current multicast group membership on a port-by-port basis. If the switch does not

receive updated membership information in a timely fashion, it stops forwarding multicasts to

the port where the end device is located.

You can configure and display information about IGMP snooping queriers on the network

and, separately, on VLANs.

Configure an IGMP Snooping Querier

You can configure the settings for an IGMP snooping querier.

To configure the settings for an IGMP snooping querier:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping Querier > Querier Configuration.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual162

6. Configure the following settings:

• Querier Admin Mode. Enable or disable IGMP snooping for the switch. The default is

Disable.

• Snooping Querier IP Address. Enter the snooping querier IP address to be used as

the source address in periodic IGMP queries. This address is used when no address

is configured on the VLAN on which a query is being sent.

• IGMP Version. Specify the IGMP protocol version used in periodic IGMP queries.

The range is 1 to 2. The default value is 2.

• Query Interval(secs). Specify the time interval in seconds between periodic queries

sent by the snooping querier. The query interval must be in the range from 1 to 1800.

The default value is 60 seconds.

•Querier Expiry Interval(secs). Specify the time interval in seconds after which the

last querier information is removed. The querier expiry interval must be in the range

from 60 to 300. The default value is 125 seconds.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure an IGMP Snooping Querier for VLANs

You can configure IGMP queriers for use with VLANs on the network.

To configure IGMP snooping for a VLAN ID:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual163

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping Querier > Querier VLAN Configuration.

6. From the VLAN ID menu, select New Entry.

7. Configure the following settings:

• VLAN ID. The VLAN ID for which the IGMP snooping querier must be enabled. You

can select an existing VLAN only.

• Querier Election Participate Mode. Enable or disable the querier mode:

- Disable. Upon seeing another querier of the same version in the VLAN, the

snooping querier moves to the non-querier state.

- Enable. The snooping querier participates in querier election, in which the lowest

IP address operates as the querier in that VLAN. The other querier moves to

non-querier state.

• Snooping Querier VLAN Address. Specify the snooping querier IP address to be

used as the source address in periodic IGMP queries that are sent to the VLAN.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Display IGMP Snooping Querier for VLAN Status

To display querier VLAN status:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual164

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping Querier > Querier VLAN Status.

6. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Update button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 38. Querier VLAN Status information

Field Description

VLAN ID The VLAN ID on which IGMP snooping querier is administratively enabled and the

VLAN exists in the VLAN database.

Operational State The operational state of the IGMP snooping querier on a VLAN. It can be in any of

the following states:

• Querier. The snooping switch is the querier in the VLAN. The snooping switch

sends out periodic queries with a time interval equal to the configured querier

query interval. If the snooping switch finds a better querier in the VLAN, it

moves to non-querier mode.

• Non-Querier. The snooping switch is in non-querier mode in the VLAN. If the

querier expiry interval timer expires, the snooping switch moves into querier

mode.

• Disabled. The snooping querier is not operational on the VLAN. The snooping

querier moves to disabled mode when IGMP snooping is not operational on

the VLAN or when the querier address is not configured or the network

management address is also not configured.

Operational Version The operational IGMP protocol version of the querier.

Last Querier Address The IP address of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the VLAN.

Last Querier Version The IGMP protocol version of the last querier from which a query was snooped on

the VLAN.

Operational Max Response

Time The maximum response time to be used in the queries that are sent by the

snooping querier.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual165

View, Search, and Manage the MAC

Address Table

You can view or configure the MAC Address Table. This table contains information about

unicast entries for which the switch holds forwarding or filtering information. This information

lets the transparent bridging function determine how an incoming frame must be propagated.

If you clear the MAC address entries in the MAC Address Table, only the dynamic entries are

removed.

View, Search, or Clear the MAC Address Table

To view, search, or clear the MAC Address Table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Address Table > Basic > Address Table.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual166

6. Use the Search menu and field to search for a MAC address, VLAN ID, or interface number:

• Search by MAC Address. From the Search menu, select MAC Address, and enter

the 6-byte hexadecimal MAC address in two-digit groups separated by colons, for

example, 01:23:45:67:89:AB. Then click the Go button.

If the address exists, that entry is displayed as the first entry followed by the

remaining (higher) MAC addresses. An exact match is required.

• Search VLAN ID. From the Search menu, select VLAN ID, and enter the VLAN ID, for

example, 100. Then click the Go button.

• Search Interface. From the Search menu, select Interface, and enter the interface ID

using the respective interface naming convention (for example, g1 or l1). Then click the

Go button.

7. To refresh the page with the latest information about the switch, click the Update button.

8. To clear all dynamic MAC address entries in the table, click the Clear button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 39. MAC Address Table information

Field Description

Total MAC Address The number of MAC addresses learned or configured.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the MAC address.

MAC Address The unicast MAC address for which the switch holds forwarding and/or

filtering information. The format is a 6-byte MAC address that is separated

by colons, for example 01:23:45:67:89:AB.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual167

Set the Dynamic Address Aging Interval

You can set the address aging interval for the forwarding database.

To set the address aging interval:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Address Table > Advanced > Dynamic Addresses.

6. In the Address Aging Timeout (seconds) field, specify the time-out period in seconds for

aging out dynamically learned forwarding information.

802.1D-1990 recommends a default of 300 seconds. The value can be any number

between 10 and 1000000 seconds. The default is 300.

Interface The interface upon which this address was learned.

Status The status of this entry. The meanings of the values are as follows:

• Static. The value of the corresponding instance was added by the

system or a user and cannot be relearned.

• Learned. The value of the corresponding instance was learned, and is

being used.

• Management. The value of the corresponding instance is also the

value of an existing instance of dot1dStaticAddress.

Table 39. MAC Address Table information (continued)

Field Description

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual168

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Add a Static MAC Address to the MAC Address Table

To add a static MAC address to the MAC Address Table:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Address Table > Advanced > Static MAC Address.

6. From the Interface menu, select the interface.

7. In the Static MAC Address field, enter the static MAC address that you want to add.

8. From the VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN ID that must be associated with the MAC

address.

9. Click the Add button.

The static MAC address is added to the switch.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual169

Configure Layer 2 Loop Protection

Loops inside a network are costly because they consume resources and reduce the

performance of the network. Detecting loops manually can be cumbersome.

The switch can automatically identify loops in the network. You can enable loop protection

per port or globally.

If loop protection is enabled, the switch sends predefined PDU packets to a Layer 2

broadcast destination address (FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF) on all ports for which the feature is

enabled. You can selectively disable PDU packet transmission for loop protection on specific

ports even while port loop protection is enabled. If the switch receives a packet with the

previously mentioned broadcast destination address, the source MAC address in the packet

is compared with the MAC address of the switch. If the MAC address does not match, the

packet is forwarded to all ports that are members of the same VLAN, just like any other

broadcast packet. The packet is not forwarded to the port from which it was received.

If the source MAC address matches the MAC address of the switch, the switch can perform

one of the following actions, depending on how you configure the action:

•The port is shut down.

•A log message is generated. (If a syslog server is configured, the log message can be

sent to the syslog server.)

•The port is shut down and a log message is generated.

Loop protection is not intended for ports that serve as uplinks between spanning tree–aware

switches. It is intended for unmanaged switches that drop spanning tree BPDUs. Loop

protection detects physical and logical loops between Ethernet ports on a device. You must

enable loop protection globally before you can enable and configure it at the interface level.

Loop protection is supported on physical interfaces and static LAG interfaces, but not on

dynamic LAG interfaces.

Configure Global Layer 2 Loop Protection

To configure L2 loop protection globally:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual170

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > L2 Loop Protection > L2 Loop Protection Configuration.

6. To enable or disable loop protection feature, select the Admin Mode Enable or Disable

radio button.

By default, the Disable radio button is selected.

7. From the Transmit Interval menu, select the time in seconds between transmission of loop

packets.

The default transmit interval is 5 seconds.

8. From the Max PDU Receive menu, select the maximum number of packets to be received

before an action is taken.

The default is 1.

9. In the Disable Timer field, enter the time in seconds after which a port is disabled when a

loop is detected.

The range is from 0 to 604800 seconds. The default is 0 seconds.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View and Configure Layer 2 Loop Protection on a Port

To view and configure L2 loop protection on a port:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual171

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > L2 Loop Protection > L2 Loop Protection Configuration.

6. Use one of the following methods to narrow down the ports that are displayed:

•To display all the physical ports, click the 1 link.

•To display all LAGs only, click the LAG link.

•To display all ports and LAGs, click the All link.

•In the Go To Port field, type the port number, for example g18, and click the Go

button.

7. Select one or more check boxes for to the left of the Port column.

8. From the Keep Alive menu, select Enable or Disable to specify whether keep-alives are

enabled on an interface.

The default is Disable.

9. From the RX Action menu, select the action that occurs when the switch detects a loop on

an interface:

• Log. The switch logs a message.

• Disable. The switch disables the interface. This is the default action.

•Both. The switch both logs a message and disables the interface.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

11. Click the Clear button to clear all the statistics in the table.

12. Click the Update button to update the page to show the latest information.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Switching User Manual172

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 40. L2 Loop Protection Interface Information

Field Description

Loop Detected Shows whether a loop is detected on the interface. If the interface is disabled and then

reenabled, the status changes to No again.

Loop Count The number of packets that were received after the loop was detected.

Time Since Last Loop The time that elapsed since the loop was detected.

Port Status The status of the interface (Enabled, Disabled, or D-Disabled, which stands for

diagnostically disabled).

173

4Configure Quality of Service

This chapter contains the following sections.

•Quality of Service Concepts

•Manage Class of Service

•Manage Differentiated Services

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual174

Quality of Service Concepts

In a switch, each physical port consists of one or more queues for transmitting packets on the

attached network. Multiple queues per port are often provided to give preference to certain

packets over others based on user-defined criteria. When a packet is queued for

transmission in a port, the rate at which it is serviced depends on how the queue is

configured and possibly the amount of traffic present in the other queues of the port. If a

delay is necessary, packets are held in the queue until the scheduler authorizes the queue for

transmission. As queues become full, packets can no longer be held for transmission and are

dropped by the switch.

Quality of Service (QoS) is a means of providing consistent, predictable data delivery by

distinguishing packets with strict timing requirements from those that are more tolerant of

delay. Packets with strict timing requirements are given special treatment in a QoS-capable

network. With this in mind, all elements of the network must be QoS capable. The presence

of at least one node that is not QoS capable creates a deficiency in the network path, and the

performance of the entire packet flow is compromised.

Manage Class of Service

The Class of Service (CoS) queueing feature lets you directly configure certain aspects of

switch queueing. This provides the desired QoS behavior for dif ferent types of network traffic

when the complexities of DiffServ are not required. The priority of a packet arriving at an

interface can be used to steer the packet to the appropriate outbound CoS queue through a

mapping table. CoS queue characteristics that affect queue mapping, such as minimum

guaranteed bandwidth or transmission rate shaping, are user configurable at the queue (or

port) level.

Eight queues per port are supported.

CoS Configuration Concepts

You can set the Class of Service trust mode for an interface. Each port in the switch can be

configured to trust one of the packet fields (802.1p or IP DSCP), or to not trust any packet’s

priority designation (untrusted mode). If the port is set to a trusted mode, it uses a mapping

table appropriate for the trusted field being used. This mapping table indicates the CoS

queue to which the packet must be forwarded on the appropriate egress port. Of course, the

trusted field must exist in the packet for the mapping table to be of any use. If this is not the

case, default actions are performed. These actions involve directing the packet to a specific

CoS level configured for the ingress port as a whole, based on the existing port default

priority as mapped to a traffic class by the current 802.1p mapping table.

Alternatively, when a port is configured as untrusted, it does not trust any incoming packet

priority designation and uses the port default priority value instead. All packets arriving at the

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual175

ingress of an untrusted port are directed to a specific CoS queue on the appropriate egress

ports, in accordance with the configured default priority of the ingress port. This process is

also used for cases where a trusted port mapping cannot be honored, such as when a non-IP

packet arrives at a port configured to trust the IP DSCP value.

Configure Global CoS Settings

To configure CoS trust mode settings on all interfaces:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS> CoS > Basic > CoS Configuration.

6. Either configure the same CoS trust mode settings for all CoS-configurable interfaces or

configure CoS settings per interface.

By default, the Global radio button is selected.

•To configure the same CoS trust mode settings for all CoS configurable interfaces, do

the following:

a. Select the Global radio button.

b. From the Global Trust Mode menu, select one of the following trust mode

options for ingress traffic on the switch:

-Untrusted. Do not trust any CoS packet marking at ingress.

- 802.1p. The eight priority tags that are specified in IEEE 802.1p are p0 to p7.

The QoS setting lets you map each of the eight priority levels to one of eight

internal hardware priority queues. The default mode is 802.1p.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual176

- DSCP. The six most significant bits of the DiffServ field are called the

Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) bits.

•To configure CoS settings per interface, do the following:

a. Select the Interface radio button.

b. From the Interface Trust Mode menu, select one of the following trust mode

options:

- Untrusted. Do not trust any CoS packet marking at ingress.

- 802.1p. The eight priority tags that are specified in IEEE 802.1p are p0 to p7.

The QoS setting lets you map each of the eight priority levels to one of seven

internal hardware priority queues. The default mode is 802.1p.

- DSCP. The six most significant bits of the DiffServ field are called the

Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) bits.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure CoS Interface Settings for an Interface

You can configure the trust mode for one or more interfaces and apply an interface shaping

rate to all interfaces or to a specific interface.

To configure CoS settings for an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > CoS > Advanced > CoS Interface Configuration.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual177

6. Click the LAG link to display all LAG interfaces or click the All link to display both all physical

and all LAG interfaces.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the Interface Trust Mode menu, select one of the following trust mode options for

ingress traffic on the selected interfaces:

•Untrusted. Do not trust any CoS packet marking at ingress.

• 802.1p. The eight priority tags that are specified in IEEE 802.1p are p0 to p7. The

QoS setting lets you map each of the eight priority levels to one of seven internal

hardware priority queues. The default value is 802.1p.

• DSCP. The six most significant bits of the DiffServ field are called the Differentiated

Services Code Point (DSCP) bits.

9. In the Interface Shaping Rate field, specify the maximum outbound transmission rate

bandwidth in kbps.

This setting is used to shape the outbound transmission rate in increments of 16 kbps in

the range from 16 to 1,000,000 kbps. This value is controlled independently of any

per-queue maximum bandwidth configuration. It is effectively a second-level shaping

mechanism. The default value is 0. The value 0 means that the maximum is unlimited.

The expected shaping at egress interface is calculated as follows:

frameSize × shaping/(frameSize + IFG), where IFG (Inter frame gap) is 20 bytes,

frameSize is configured frame size, and shaping is configured traffic shaping.

For example, if 64 bytes frame size and 64 kbps shaping are configured, the expected

shaping is approximately 48 kbps.

10. In the Interface Ingress Rate Limit field, specify the maximum inbound transmission rate

bandwidth in kbps.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual178

This setting is used to shape the inbound transmission rate in increments of 16 kbps in

the range from 16 to 1,000,000 kbps. The interface discards traffic that arrives at a

bandwidth in excess of the specified limit.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure CoS Queue Settings for an Interface

You can define what a particular queue does by configuring switch egress queues.

User-configurable parameters control the amount of bandwidth used by the queue, the queue

depth during times of congestion, and the scheduling of packet transmission from the set of

all queues on a port. Each port contains its own CoS queue-related configuration.

The configuration process is simplified by allowing each CoS queue parameter to be

configured globally or per port. A global configuration change is automatically applied to all

ports in the system.

To configure CoS queue settings for an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > CoS > Advanced > Interface Queue Configuration.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual179

6. Click the LAG link to display all LAG interfaces or click the All link to display both all physical

and all LAG interfaces.

7. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

8. From the Queue ID menu, select the queue to be configured.

You can select a queue from 0 to 7.

9. From the Scheduler Type menu, select one of the following options:

• Strict. The interface services traffic with the highest priority on a queue first.

• Weighted. The interface uses weighted round robin to associate a weight to each

queue. This is the default setting.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The Queue Management Type field displays the queue depth management technique

that is used for queues on the interface. By default, this method is Taildrop, irrespective

of your selection from the Scheduler Type menu.

Map 802.1p Priorities to Queues

You can view or change which internal traffic classes are mapped to the 802.1p priority class

values in Ethernet frames that the device receives. The priority-to-traffic class mappings can

be applied globally or per interface. The mapping allows the switch to group various traffic

types (for example, data or voice) based on their latency requirements and give preference to

time-sensitive traffic.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual180

To map 802.1p priorities to queues:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > CoS > Advanced > 802.1p to Queue Mapping.

6. In the 802.1p to Queue Mapping table, map each of the eight 802.1p priorities to a queue

(internal traffic class) from 0 to 7.

The 802.1p Priority row contains traffic class selectors for each of the eight 802.1p

priorities to be mapped. The priority goes from low (0) to high (7). For example, traf fic with

a priority of 0 is for most data traffic and is sent using best effort. Traffic with a higher

priority, such as 7, might be time-sensitive traffic, such as voice or video.

The values in the menu under each priority represent the traffic class. The traffic class is

the hardware queue for a port. Higher traffic class values indicate a higher queue

position. Before traffic in a lower queue is sent, it must wait for traffic in higher queues to

be sent.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual181

Map DSCP Values to Queues

You can map an internal traffic class to a DSCP value.

To map DSCP values to queues:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > CoS > Advanced > DSCP to Queue Mapping.

6. For each DSCP value, select from the corresponding Queue menu which internal traffic

class must be mapped to the DSCP value.

The traffic class is the hardware queue for a port. Higher traffic class values indicate a

higher queue position. Before traffic in a lower queue is sent, it must wait for traffic in

higher queues to be sent.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual182

The allowed Per Hop Behavior (PHBs) values, besides other DSCP experimental values,

are as follows:

• Class Selector (CS) PHB. These values are based on IP precedence.

• Assured Forwarding (AF) PHB. These values define four main levels to sort and

manipulate some flows within the network.

•Expedited Forwarding (EF) PHB. These values are used to prioritize traffic for

real-time applications. In many situations, if the network exceeded traffic and you

need some bandwidth guaranteed for an application, the EF traffic must receive this

rate independently of the intensity of any other traffic attempting to transit the node.

The Other DSCP Values (Local/Experimental Use) section allows you to set non-default

values for advanced settings.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Manage Differentiated Services

The QoS feature contains Differentiated Services (DiffServ) support that allows traffic to be

classified into streams and given certain QoS treatment in accordance with defined per-hop

behaviors.

Standard IP-based networks provide best-effort data delivery service. Best-effort service

implies that the network delivers the data in a timely fashion, although there is no guarantee.

If congestion occurs, packets might be delayed, sent sporadically, or dropped. For typical

Internet applications, such as email and file transfers, a slight degradation in service is

acceptable and in many cases unnoticeable. However, any degradation of service can

negatively affect applications with strict timing requirements, such as voice and multimedia.

Defining DiffServ

To use DiffServ for QoS, you must first define the following categories and their criteria:

1. Class. Create classes and define class criteria.

2. Policy. Create policies, associate classes with policies, and define policy statements.

3. Service. Add a policy to an inbound interface.

Packets are classified and processed based on defined criteria. The classification criteria are

defined by a class. The processing is defined by a policy’ s attributes. Policy attributes can be

defined on a per-class instance basis, and it is these attributes that are applied when a match

occurs. A policy can contain multiples classes. When the policy is active, the actions taken

depend on which class matches the packet.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual183

Note the following about the DiffServ process:

•Packets are filtered and processed based on defined criteria. The filtering criteria is

defined by a class. The processing is defined by a policy's attributes. Policy attributes can

be defined on a per-class instance basis, and it is these attributes that are applied when a

match occurs.

•The configuration process begins with defining one or more match criteria for a class.

Then one or more classes are added to a policy. Policies are then added to interfaces.

•Packet processing begins by testing the match criteria for a packet. The All class type

option specifies that each match criteria within a class must evaluate to true for a packet

to match that class. The Any class type option specifies that at least one match criteria

must evaluate to true for a packet to match that class. Classes are tested in the order in

which they were added to the policy. A policy is applied to a packet when a class match

within that policy is found.

Configure and Display Global DiffServ Settings

You can display DiffServ general status group information, which includes the current

administrative mode setting as well as the current and maximum number of rows in each of

the main DiffServ private MIB tables.

To configure the global DiffServ mode and display DiffServ general status group

information:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > DiffServ Configuration.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual184

6. Select the administrative mode for DiffServ:

• Enable. Differentiated services are active. This is the default setting.

•Disable. The DiffServ configuration is retained and can be changed but is not active.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the information displayed in the Status table on the DiffServ

Configuration page.

Table 41. DiffServ Status information

Field Description

Class Table The number of configured DiffServ classes out of the total allowed on the switch.

Class Rule table The number of configured class rules out of the total allowed on the switch.

Policy table The number of configured policies out of the total allowed on the switch.

Policy Instance table The number of configured policy class instances out of the total allowed on the

switch.

Policy Attributes table The number of configured policy attributes (attached to the policy class instances)

out of the total allowed on the switch.

Service table The number of configured services (attached to the policies on specified interfaces)

out of the total allowed on the switch.

Configure a DiffServ Class

You can add a new DiffServ class name, or rename or delete an existing class. You can also

define the criteria to associate with a DiffServ class. As packets are received, these DiffServ

classes are used to prioritize packets. You can set up multiple match criteria in a class. The

logic is a Boolean logical AND for this criteria. After creating a class, click the class link to the

Class page.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual185

Add and Configure a DiffServ Class

To add and configure a DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Class Configuration.

The Class Name page displays.

6. In the Class Name field, enter a class name.

The Class Name field also lists all existing DiffServ class names, from which you can

select one for modification or deletion. The class name can be 1 to 31 alphanumeric

characters in length.

The switch supports only the class type value All, which means that all the various match

criteria defined for the class are satisfied for a packet match. All signifies the logical AND

statement of all the match criteria. For any class that you add, the class type is All.

7. Click the Add button.

The new class is added.

8. After creating the class, click the class name.

The class name is a hyperlink to the page on which you can define the class

configuration.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual186

9. Define the criteria that must be associated the DiffServ class by selecting one of the

following radio buttons:

• Match Every. Select this radio button to add a match condition that considers all

packets to belong to the class. The only selection from the Match Every menu is Any.

•Reference Class. Select this radio button to reference another class for criteria. The

match criteria defined in the reference class function as match criteria in addition to

the match criteria that you define for the selected class. After you select the radio

button, the classes that can be referenced are displayed. Select the class to

reference. A class can reference only one other class of the same type.

• Class of Service. Select this radio button to require the Class of Service (CoS) value

in an Ethernet frame header to match the specified CoS value. This option lists all the

values for the Class of Service match criterion in the range 0 to 7 from which you can

select one.

• VLAN. Select this radio button to require a packet’s VLAN ID to match a VLAN ID.

The VLAN value is in the range from 1 to 4093.

• Ethernet Type. Select this radio button to require the EtherType value in the Ethernet

frame header to match the specified EtherType value. After you select the radio

button, select the EtherType keyword from the menu of common protocols that are

mapped to their Ethertype value. You can also select User Value from the menu and

enter a value in the hexadecimal range from 600 to ffff.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual187

• Source MAC. Select this radio button to require a packet’s source MAC address to

match the specified MAC address. After you select this radio button, use the following

fields to configure the source MAC address match criteria:

- Address. The source MAC address to match. The source MAC address is

specified as six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons.

- Mask. The MAC mask, which specifies the bits in the source MAC address to

compare against the Ethernet frame. Use Fs and zeros to configure the MAC

mask. An F means that the bit is checked, and a zero in a bit position means that

the data is not significant. For example, if the MAC address is aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff,

and the mask is ff:ff:00:00:00:00, all MAC addresses with aa:bb:xx:xx:xx:xx result

in a match (where x is any hexadecimal number). Note that this is not a wildcard

mask, which ACLs use.

• Destination MAC. Select this radio button to require a packet’s destination MAC

address to match the specified MAC address. After you select the radio button, use

the following fields to configure the destination MAC address match criteria:

- Address. The destination MAC address to match. The destination MAC address

is specified as six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons.

- Mask. The MAC mask, which specifies the bits in the destination MAC address to

compare against an Ethernet frame. Use Fs and zeros to configure the MAC

mask. An F means that the bit is checked, and a zero in a bit position means that

the data is not significant. For example, if the MAC address is aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff,

and the mask is ff:ff:00:00:00:00, all MAC addresses with aa:bb:xx:xx:xx:xx result

in a match (where x is any hexadecimal number). Note that this is not a wildcard

mask, which ACLs use.

• Protocol T ype. Select this radio button to require a packet’s Layer 4 protocol to match

the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. You can also select

Other from the menu and enter a protocol number from 0 to 255.

• Source IP. Select this radio button to require a packet’s source IP address to match

the specified IP address. After you select the radio button, use the following fields to

configure the source IP address match criteria:

- Address. The source IP address format to match in dotted-decimal.

-Mask. The bit mask in IP dotted-decimal format indicating which parts of the

source IP address to use for matching against packet content.

•Source L4 Port. Select this radio button to require a packet’s TCP/UDP source port to

match the specified protocol, which you must select from the menu. You can also

select Other from the menu and enter a port number from 0 to 65535.

• Destination IP. Select this radio button to require a packet’s destination IP address to

match the specified IP address. After you select the radio button, use the following

fields to configure the destination IP address match criteria:

- Address. The destination IP address format to match in dotted-decimal.

-Mask. The bit mask in IP dotted-decimal format indicating which parts of the

destination IP address to use for matching against packet content.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual188

• Destination L4 Port. Select this radio button to require a packet’s TCP/UDP

destination port to match the specified protocol. You can also select Other from the

menu and enter a port number from 0 to 65535.

• IP DSCP. Select this radio button to require the packet’s IP DiffServ Code Point

(DSCP) value to match the specified IP DSCP keyword code, which you must select

from the menu. You can also select Other from the menu and enter an IP DSCP

value from 0 to 63. The DSCP value is defined as the high-order 6 bits of the Service

Type octet in the IP header.

• Precedence V alue. Select this radio button to require the packet’s IP precedence

value to match the specified number from 0 to 7, which you must select from the

menu. The IP Precedence field in a packet is defined as the high-order 3 bits of the

Service Type octet in the IP header.

• IP ToS. Select this radio button to require the packet’s Type of Service (ToS) bits in

the IP header to match the specified value. The IP ToS field in a packet is defined as

all 8 bits of the service type octet in the IP header. After you select the radio button,

use the following fields to configure the ToS match criteria:

- Bits V alue. Enter a two-digit hexadecimal number octet value in the range from 00

to ff to match the bits in a packet’s ToS field.

- Bit Mask. Specify the bit positions that are used for comparison against the IP

ToS field in a packet.

10. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed in the Class

Summary section at the bottom of the DiffServ Class Configuration page.

Table 42. DiffServ Class Configuration, Class Summary information

Field Description

Match Criteria The configured match criteria for the specified class.

Values The values of the configured match criteria.

Rename an Existing DiffServ Class

To rename an existing DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual189

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Class Configuration.

The Class Name page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the class name.

7. In the Class Name field, specify the new name.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Change the Criteria for an Existing DiffServ Class

To change the criteria for an existing DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Class Configuration.

The Class Name page displays.

6. Click the class name, which is a hyperlink.

The page on which you can change the class configuration displays.

7. Change the class configuration as needed.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual190

Delete a DiffServ Class

To delete a DiffServ class:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Class Configuration.

The Class Name page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the class name.

7. Click the Delete button.

The class is removed.

Configure a DiffServ Policy

You can associate a collection of classes with one or more policies.

Create and Configure a DiffServ Policy

To create and configure a DiffServ policy:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual191

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration.

The Policy Configuration page displays.

6. Enter a policy name in the Policy Name field.

You cannot specify the policy type. By default, the policy type is In, indicating that the

policy applies to ingress packets.

7. From the Member Class menu, optionally select an existing class that you want to

associate with the new policy.

8. Click the Add button.

The new policy is added.

9. After creating the policy, click the policy name.

The policy name is a hyperlink to the page on which you can define the policy attributes.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual192

10. Configure the policy attributes by selecting one of the following radio buttons:

• Assign Queue. Select this radio button to specify that traffic must be assigned to a

queue, which you must select from the menu. The queue is expressed as a value in

the range from 0 to 7.

• Drop. Select this radio button to require each inbound packet to be dropped.

• Mark VLAN CoS. Select this radio button to specify the VLAN priority, which you must

select from the menu. The VLAN priority is expressed as a value in the range from 0

to 7.

• Mark IP Precedence. Select this radio button to require packets to be marked with an

IP precedence value before being forwarded. You must select an IP precedence

value from 0 to 7 from the menu.

• Mirror. Select this radio button to require packets to be mirrored to an interface or

LAG, one of which you must select from the menu.

• Redirect. Select this radio button to require packets to be redirected to an interface or

LAG, one of which you must select from the menu.

• Mark IP DSCP. Select this radio button to require packet to be marked with an IP

DSCP keyword code, which you must select from the menu. The DSCP value is

defined as the high-order 6 bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header.

• Simple Policy. Select this radio button to define the traffic policing style for the class.

By default, this simple policy is color blind, and color classes do not apply. A simple

policy supports a single data rate and results in one of two outcomes: conform or

violate. Packets that violate the policy are always dropped. That is, you cannot specify

any other action for those packets. You must specify a policy action for packets that

conform to the policy.

- Committed Rate. Enter the committed rate that is applied to conforming packets

by specifying a value in the range from 1 to 4294967295 Kbps.

-In the Conform Action section, select one of the following radio buttons:

• Send. Packets are forwarded unmodified. This is the default confirming action.

•Drop. Packets are dropped. This is the default (and only) violating action.

•Mark CoS. Packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified CoS value

before being forwarded. This selection requires that the Mark CoS field is set.

You must select a CoS value from 0 to 7 from the menu.

• Mark IP Precedence. These packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified

IP Precedence value before being forwarded. This selection requires that the

Mark IP Precedence field is set. You must select an IP precedence value from

0 to 7 from the menu.

• Mark IP DSCP. Packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified DSCP value

before being forwarded. This selection requires that the DSCP field is set. You

must either select a DSCP code from the menu or enter an IP DSCP value

from 0 to 63 in the field next to the menu. A value that you enter in the field

overrides any selection from the menu.

The DSCP value is defined as the high-order six bits of the Service Type octet

in the IP header.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual193

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Rename an Existing DiffServ Policy

To rename an existing DiffServ policy:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration.

The Policy Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the policy name.

7. In the Policy Name field, specify the new name.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Change the Policy Attributes for an Existing DiffServ Policy

To change the policy attributes for an existing DiffServ policy:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual194

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration.

The Policy Configuration page displays.

6. Click the policy name, which is a hyperlink.

The page on which you can change the policy attributes displays.

7. Change the policy attributes as needed.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove a Class From an Existing DiffServ Policy

To remove a class from an existing DiffServ policy:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration.

The Policy Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the policy name.

7. From the Member Class menu, select None.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual195

8. Click the Apply button.

The class is removed from the policy.

Delete a DiffServ Policy

To delete a DiffServ policy:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration.

The Policy Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the policy name.

7. Click the Delete button.

The policy is removed.

Configure the DiffServ Service Interface

You can assign (attach) a policy to an interface.

Attach a DiffServ Policy to an Interface

To attach a DiffServ policy to an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual196

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Service Configuration.

6. Select one or more interfaces by taking one of the following actions:

•To configure a single interface, select the check box associated with the port, or type

the port number in the Go To Interface field and click the Go button.

•To configure multiple interfaces with the same settings, select the check box

associated with each interface.

•To configure all interfaces with the same settings, select the check box in the heading

row.

7. From the Policy Name menu, select a policy name.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 43. Service Interface Configuration information

Field Description

Direction Shows the traffic direction of this service interface, which is always inbound (In).

Operational Status Shows the operational status of this service interface (either Up or Down).

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual197

Remove a DiffServ Policy From an Interface

To remove a DiffServ policy from an interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Service Configuration.

The Service Interface Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check boxes that are associated with the interfaces from which you want to

remove the policy.

7. From the Policy In Name menu, select None.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

View DiffServ Service Statistics

You can display service-level statistical information about all interfaces to which DiffServ

policies are attached.

To view the DiffServ service statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Configure Quality of Service User Manual198

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Service Statistics.

The Service Statistics page displays.

6. Click the Update button to refresh the page with the latest information about the switch.

The following table describes the information available on the Service Statistics page.

Table 44. DiffServ Service Statistics information

Field Description

Interface All valid port numbers on the switch with a DiffServ policy that is attached in the inbound

direction.

Direction The traffic direction of interface is inbound (In). This field shows only the direction for

which a DiffServ policy is attached.

Policy Name The name of the policy that is currently attached to the specified interface and direction.

Operational Status The operational status of the policy that is attached to the specified interface and

direction. The value is either Up or Down.

Member Classes All DiffServ classes that are defined as members of the selected policy name. Select a

member class name to display its statistics. If no class is associated with the selected

policy, then the list is empty.

199

5Manage Device Security

This chapter contains the following sections:

•Configure the Management Security Settings

•Configure Management Access

•Configure Port Authentication

•Set Up Traffic Control

•Configure Access Control Lists

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Manage Device Security User Manual200

Configure the Management Security

Settings

You can configure the login password, Remote Authorization Dial-In User Service (RADIUS)

settings, Terminal Access Controller Access Control System (TACACS) settings, and

authentication lists.

Change the Password for the Local Browser Interface

You can change the login password for the default user with the user name admin.

To change the login password for the local browser interface:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security> Management Security > User Configuration > Change Password.

The Change Password page displays.

6. In the Current Password field, enter the current password.

The default password is password. The password is displayed in dots.

7. In the New Password field, specify the new password.

The password is displayed in dots. A password can be up to 20 alphanumeric characters

in length, and is case-sensitive.

8. In the Confirm Password field, enter the password again to confirm that you entered it

correctly.

The password is displayed in dots.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Manage Device Security User Manual201

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Note: If you forget the password and are unable to log in to the switch local

browser interface, press the Factory Defaults button on the front

panel of the switch for more than five seconds. The device reboots,

and all switch settings, including the password, are reset to the factory

default values.

Manage the RADIUS Settings

RADIUS servers provide additional security for networks. The RADIUS server maintains a

user database, which contains per-user authentication information. The switch passes

information to the configured RADIUS server, which can authenticate a user name and

password before authorizing use of the network. RADIUS servers provide a centralized

authentication method for the following:

•Web access

•Access control port (802.1X)

Configure the Global RADIUS Server Settings

You can add information about one or more RADIUS servers on the network.

If you configure multiple RADIUS servers, consider the maximum delay time when you

specify the maximum number of retransmissions (that is, the value that you enter in the Max

Number of Retransmits field) and the time-out period (that is, the value that you enter in the

Timeout Duration field) for RADIUS:

For one RADIUS server, a retransmission does not occur until the configured time-out

period expires without a response from the RADIUS server. In addition. the maximum

number of retransmissions for one RADIUS server must pass before the switch attempts

the next RADIUS server.

Therefore, the maximum delay in receiving a RADIUS response on the switch equals the

maximum number of retransmissions multiplied by the time-out period multiplied by the

number of configured RADIUS servers. If the RADIUS request was generated by a user

response.

To configure the global RADIUS server settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Manage Device Security User Manual202

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Global Configuration.

The Current Server IP Address field is blank if no servers are configured (see Configure

a RADIUS Authentication Server on the Switch on page 203). The switch supports up to

three RADIUS servers. If more than one RADIUS server is configured, the current server

is the server configured as the primary server. If no servers are configured as the primary

server, the current server is the most recently added RADIUS server.

CAUTION:

The maximum delay in receiving a RADIUS response on the switch equals

the maximum number of retransmissions multiplied by the time-out period

multiplied by the number of configured RADIUS servers. If the RADIUS

request was generated by a user login attempt, all user interfaces are

blocked until the switch receives a RADIUS response.

6. In the Max Number of Retransmits field, specify the maximum number of times a request

packet is retransmitted to the RADIUS server.

The range is from 1 to 15. The default value is 4.

7. In the Timeout Duration field, specify the time-out value, in seconds, for request

retransmissions.

The range is from 1 to 30. The default value is 5.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Manage Device Security User Manual203

8. From he Accounting Mode menu, select to disable or enable RADIUS accounting on the

server.

The default is Disabled.

9. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields displayed on the page.

Table 45. RADIUS Configuration information

Field Description

Current Server IP Address The IP address of the current server. This field is blank if no servers are

configured.

Number of Configured

Servers The number of configured authentication RADIUS servers. The value can range

from 0 to 3.

Configure a RADIUS Authentication Server on the Switch

You view and configure various settings for a RADIUS server configured on the switch.

Add a Primary RADIUS Authentication Server to the Switch

To add a primary RADIUS authentication server to the switch and view or reset the

RADIUS authentication server statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Server Configuration.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Manage Device Security User Manual204

6. In the Server Address field, specify the IP address of the RADIUS server.

7. In the Authentication Port field, specify the UDP port number that the server uses to verify

the RADIUS server authentication.

The range is from 1 to 65535. The default value is 1812.

8. From the Secret Configured menu, select Yes.

You must select Yes before you can configure the RADIUS secret. After you add the

RADIUS server, this field indicates whether the shared secret for this server was

configured.

9. In the Secret field, type the shared secret text string used for authenticating and encrypting

all RADIUS communications between the switch and the RADIUS server.

This secret must match the RADIUS encryption.

10. From the Active menu, select Primary.

11. From the Message Authenticator menu, select Enable or Disable to specify whether the

message authenticator attribute for the selected server is enabled.

The message authenticator adds protection to RADIUS messages by using an MD5 hash

to encrypt each message. The shared secret is used as the key, and if the message fails

to be verified by the RADIUS server, it is discarded.

12. Click the Add button.

The server is added to the switch.

13. To reset the authentication server and RADIUS statistics to their default values, click the

Clear Counters button.

The following table describes the RADIUS server statistics displayed on the page.

Table 46. RADIUS authentication server statistics information

Field Description

Server Address The address of the RADIUS server or the name of the RADIUS server for

which the statistics are displayed.

Round T rip Time The time interval, in hundredths of a second, between the most recent

access-reply/access-challenge and the access-request that matched it from

this RADIUS authentication server.

Access Requests The number of RADIUS access-request packets sent to this server. This

number does not include retransmissions.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Manage Device Security User Manual205

Modify the Settings for a RADIUS Authentication Server on the Switch

To modify the settings for a RADIUS authentication server on the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

Access Retransmissions The number of RADIUS access-request packets retransmitted to this server.

Access Accepts The number of RADIUS access-accept packets, including both valid and

invalid packets, that were received from this server.

Access Rejects The number of RADIUS access-reject packets, including both valid and invalid

packets, that were received from this server.

Access Challenges The number of RADIUS access-challenge packets, including both valid and

invalid packets, that were received from this server.

Malformed Access Responses The number of malformed RADIUS access-response packets received from

this server. Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length. Bad

authenticators or signature attributes or unknown types are not included in

malformed access-responses.

Bad Authenticators The number of RADIUS access-response packets containing invalid

authenticators or signature attributes received from this server.

Pending Requests The number of RADIUS access-request packets destined for this server that

did not yet time out or receive a response.

Timeouts The number of authentication time-outs to this server.

Unknown Types The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type that were received from this

server on the authentication port.

Packets Dropped The number of RADIUS packets received from this server on the

authentication port and dropped for some other reason.

Table 46. RADIUS authentication server statistics information (continued)

Field Description

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Manage Device Security User Manual206

5. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Server Configuration.

The Server Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the server IP address.

7. Modify the configuration for the selected server.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove a RADIUS Authentication Server From the Switch

To remove a RADIUS authentication server from the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Server Configuration.

The Server Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the IP address of the server to remove.

7. Click the Delete button.

The RADIUS server is removed.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Manage Device Security User Manual207

Configure a RADIUS Accounting Server

You can view and configure various settings for a RADIUS accounting server on the network.

Add a RADIUS Accounting Server to the Switch

To add a RADIUS accounting server to the switch and view or clear the RADIUS

accounting server statistics:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Accounting Server Configuration.

6. In the Accounting Server Address field, specify the IP address of the RADIUS accounting

server to add.

7. In the Port field, specify the UDP port number that the server uses to verify the RADIUS

accounting server authentication. The default UDP port number is 1813.

8. From the Secret Configured menu, select Yes to add a RADIUS secret in the next field.

You must select Yes before you can configure the RADIUS secret. After you add the

RADIUS accounting server, this field indicates whether the shared secret for this server

was configured.

9. In the Secret field, type the shared secret to use with the specified accounting server.

10. From the Accounting Mode menu, select Enable to enable the RADIUS accounting mode.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Manage Device Security User Manual208

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

12. To reset the accounting server and RADIUS statistics to their default values, click the Clear

Counters button.

The following table describes the RADIUS server statistics displayed on the page.

Table 47. RADIUS accounting server statistics information

Field Description

Accounting Server Address The accounting server associated with the statistics.

Round T rip Time (secs) The time interval, in hundredths of a second, between the most recent

accounting-response and the accounting-request that matched it from this

RADIUS accounting server.

Accounting Requests The number of RADIUS accounting-request packets sent not including

retransmissions.

Accounting Retransmissions The number of RADIUS accounting-request packets retransmitted to this

RADIUS accounting server.

Accounting Responses The number of RADIUS packets received on the accounting port from this

server.

Malformed Accounting Responses The number of malformed RADIUS accounting-response packets received

from this server. Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length.

Bad authenticators and unknown types are not included as malformed

accounting responses.

Bad Authenticators The number of RADIUS accounting-response packets that contained invalid

authenticators received from this accounting server.

Pending Requests The number of RADIUS accounting-request packets sent to this server that

did not yet time out or receive a response.

Timeouts The number of accounting time-outs to this server.

Unknown Types The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type that were received from

this server on the accounting port.

Packets Dropped The number of RADIUS packets that were received from this server on the

accounting port and dropped for some other reason.

Modify the Settings for the RADIUS Accounting Server on the Switch

To modify the settings for the RADIUS accounting server on the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Manage Device Security User Manual209

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Accounting Server Configuration.

The Accounting Server Configuration page displays.

6. Modify the configuration for the accounting server.

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Remove the RADIUS Accounting Server From the Switch

To remove the RADIUS accounting server from the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security > RADIUS > Accounting Server Configuration.

The Accounting Server Configuration page displays.

6. Remove the server IP address from the Accounting Server Address field.

Leave the field blank.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Manage Device Security User Manual210

7. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved. The RADIUS accounting server is removed.

Configure TACACS+

TACACS+ provides a centralized user management system, while still retaining consistency

with RADIUS and other authentication processes. TACACS+ provides the following services:

• Authentication. Provides authentication during login and through user names and

user-defined passwords.

• Authorization. Performed at login. When the authentication session is completed, an

authorization session starts using the authenticated user name. The TACACS+ server

checks the user privileges.

The TACACS+ protocol ensures network security through encrypted protocol exchanges

between the device and TACACS+ server.

Configure the Global TACACS+ Settings

You can configure the global TACACS+ settings for communication between the switch and

a TACACS+ server.

To configure the global TACACS+ settings:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security > TACACS+ > TACACS+ Configuration.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Manage Device Security User Manual211

6. In the Key String field, specify the authentication and encryption key for TACACS+

communications between the switch and the TACACS+ server.

The range is from 0 to 128. The key must match the key configured on the TACACS+

server.

7. In the Connection Timeout field, specify the maximum number of seconds allowed to

establish a TCP connection between the switch and the TACACS+ server.\

The range is from 1 to 30 seconds. The default is 5 seconds.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure a TACACS+ Server on the Switch

You can configure up to three TACACS+ servers with which the switch can communicate.

To configure a TACACS+ server on the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security> TACACS+ > TACACS+ Server Configuration.

6. In the TACACS+ Server field, enter the TACACS+ server IP address.

7. In the Priority field, specify the priority for the TACACS+ server.

The priority determines the order in which the TACACS+ servers are contacted when

attempting to authenticate a user. A value of 0 is the highest priority. The range is from

0 to 65535.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Manage Device Security User Manual212

8. In the Port field, specify the authentication port value for TACAS+ server sessions.

The value must be in the range from 0 to 65535. If you do not specify a value, the switch

uses the standard TCP port 49 for sessions with the server.

9. In the Key String field, specify the authentication and encryption key for TACACS+

communications between the device and the TACACS+ server.

The range is from 0 to 128. The key must match the key used on the TACACS+ server.

10. In the Connection Timeout field, specify the time that passes before the connection

between the device and the TACACS+ server times out.

The range is from 1 to 30. If you do not specify a value, the switch uses a default value

of 5 seconds.

11. Click the Add button.

The server is added to the switch.

Modify the Settings for a TACACS+ Server on the Switch

To modify the settings for a TACACS+ server on the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security> TACACS+ > TACACS+ Server Configuration.

The TACACS+ Server Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the server IP address.

7. Modify the configuration for the selected TACACS+ server.

8. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Manage Device Security User Manual213

Remove a TACACS+ Server From the Switch

To remove a TACACS+ server from the switch:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security> TACACS+ > TACACS+ Server Configuration.

The TACACS+ Server Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the server IP address.

7. Click the Delete button.

The TACACS+ server is removed.

Configure Authentication Lists

You can configure a default login list. A login list specifies one or more authentication

methods to validate switch or port access for the admin user.

Note: The admin user is assigned to a preconfigured list that is named

defaultList and that you cannot delete.

Configure an HTTP Authentication List

You can configure the default HTTP login list.

To change the HTTP authentication method for the default list:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Manage Device Security User Manual214

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security > Authentication List > HTTP Authentication

List.

6. Select the check box next to the httpList name.

7. From the menu in the 1 column, select the authentication method that must be used first in

the selected authentication login list.

If you select a method that does not time out as the first method, such as Local, no other

method is tried, even if you specified more than one method. User authentication occurs

in the order the methods are selected. Possible methods are as follows:

• Local. The user’s locally stored ID and password are used for authentication. Since

the Local method does not time out, if you select this option as the first method, no

other method is tried, even if you specified more than one method. This is the default

method. This is the default selection for Method 1.

• RADIUS. The user’s ID and password are authenticated using the RADIUS server. If

you select RADIUS or TACACS+ as the first method and an error occurs during the

authentication, the switch uses Method 2 to authenticate the user.

• TACACS+. The user’s ID and password are authenticated using the TACACS+

server. If you select RADIUS or TACACS+ as the first method and an error occurs

during the authentication, the switch attempts user authentication Method 2.

• None. The authentication method is unspecified, that is, no authentication is required.

8. From the menu in the 2 column, select the authentication method, if any, that must be used

second in the selected authentication login list.

This is the method that is used if the first method times out. If you select a method that

does not time out as the second method, the third method is not tried.

9. From the menu in the 3 column, select the authentication method, if any, that must be used

third in the selected authentication login list.

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Manage Device Security User Manual215

10. From the menu in the 4 column, select the method, if any, that must be used fourth in the

selected authentication login list.

This is the method that is used if all previous methods time out.

11. Click the Apply button.

Your settings are saved.

Configure an HTTPS Authentication List

You can configure the default login list for secure HTTP (HTTPS).

To configure an HTTPS authentication list:

1. Connect your computer to the same network as the switch.

You can use a WiFi or wired connection to connect your computer to the network, or

connect directly to a switch that is off-network using an Ethernet cable.

2. Launch a web browser.

3. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.

If you do not know the IP address of the switch, see Discover or Change the Switch IP

Address on page 12.

Your web browser might display a security message, which you can ignore. For more

information, see Access the Local Browser Interface on page 19.

The login window opens.

4. Enter the switch’s password in the Password field.

The default password is password.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Security > Management Security > Authentication List > HTTPS Authentication

List.

6. Select the check box next to the httpsList name.

7. From the menu in the 1 column, select the authentication method that must be used first in

the selected authentication login list.

If you select a method that does not time out as the first method, such as Local, no other

method is tried, even if you specified more than one method. This setting does not

display when you first create a new login list. User authentication occurs in the order the

methods are selected. Possible methods are as follows:

• Local. The user’s locally stored ID and password are used for authentication. Since

the Local method does not time out, if you select this option as the first method, no

S350 Series 8-Port Gigabit Ethernet Smart Managed Pro Switch Models GS308T and GS310TP

Manage Device Security User Manual216

other method is tried, even if you specified more than one method. This is the default

selection for Method 1.